Me . 
1 - 
. 
s * 

* 

= 945 
19128 15 
— k x: 
1% 4 * $6 
= 


InaturaL METHOD 


"EACHING 


2 75 "The Firſt Book. | on 
Being the 5 
| ACCIDENCE 
IN 


ſreplained, Fry Abridg l, He Fitted 
to the Capacity and Uſe of = loweſt Form, 


Leading the Learner 
Letters to Syllables. 
: Syllables to Words. 
From C Words to Sentences. 1. Single. 2. Compounded. 
q Where is added an account of the Tranſpoſition, 
and moſt uſual Ellipſes of Words in a Sentence. 


L Exemples to be imitated. 

II. Rules to direct the imitation. 

III. Exerciſes Latin and Engliſh to aſcertain 
the imitation by the dire&ionof the Rules. 

5g Into which is inſerted 

A Vocabulary of Engliſh and Latin Words under each part ol Speech, 


F reduced into tolerable order. 
* Sententiæ Pueriles, Engliſh and Latin, conſiſting of the ſame Words 


put into plain Sentences under every $, ntactick Rule. 


The Eighth | Gdition, 1 pet moze e fitted foz the uſe of the loweſt 5 
mn By SAMUEL HOADLY, M. A. 3 


5 N po I Printed iat NM. W T. and Sold by T AsTTE T2 
= the Ceſe iu St. Paul. Church yard. 1728. 23 


TA 
® 

BY perpetual, 
Plain, eaſy 
and neceſſary 


* 


"op 5 
C2 #2. 
hn : 


PS 2 .F1 3 Verdy 4. 
ors W 3 4 ediauſte 
53 4 a une 


(DE: © 


13 1 K 


Pint ie 


33 | 2210 0% > 8301288 ere ende 
A, — Se h . ” 341.732 oy 5 + eng 7 by 
- 5 FN 7 + * 4 H . | 1 1 » J 4. omitti. 


3 _ . CT] 3357 2 : 1 limiti; 


"A 2 2 


7 # 
. þ 1 F 7 +» * * 
pay PST. * P 
- 


” . 7 1 > EP 1 at 22 
ot ROE 5 


P 


reface. 


o 


nd Engliſh into Latin before he be put ints the other; it condemns the poſting 
Halt 2h? 7s too uſual, and affirming that the variety of teaching it, is, 
1 nd always will be diverl e, it gives ſuch directions about it as are here 
Tellorbed. And there Authority itſelf not only leaves each man ta make his beſt 
ze of the Accidence, but invites him to do his beſt to make it gain its end. 
Ar is not amis (you read there) if one ſecing by trial an eaſier 
and ceadier way than the common ſozr of Teachers do, would 
Jap (7.e. pbl;6) mbar he hath pꝛoved, and fo2 rhe comniodity al · 


ſoweo; hat o:yers nor knowing the ſame mighr by experience 
Pꝛove tle like ; (which 7s all I deſire) and then by pꝛoot᷑ reaſona- 
lp judge the liae, not hereby exctuding rhe berter way when it 
Is kound, bur in the mean ſeaſon (cl that be done) forbidding 
Tye wozte. 4s therefore taking the Accidence for the ground-work, and 


_ Reeping to the matter and words of it as far as could le: that which I have 


gere endeavoured, is to find out the way to make it as uſeful as it is capable of 


Ping, by giving light to what was dark, and perſpicuity to what was obſcure ; 


i * : 4 


=» omitting what was needleſs, and deferring what was not fit to be taught; 
Wy limiting what was boundleſs, and refifying what was falſe 3 but eſpecially 


Putting life and vigour into what is otherwiſe dead, by abundance of plain 


= id eaſy Exemples in both Tonzues ad juſted parallel to each other every where; 
by reducing the whole into ſuch order and method, that every thing might 
und in its proper place, and every operation done in its proper jeaſon, the 
go mer making way for the latter, and both interchangeabty giving and recei- 
ws light and ſtrength, ſo that no one mation might claſh and interfere with 
ther, none anticipaie another, nor unſeaſonably interpaje itſelf. This is that, 
, which ron, endeavoured ; but bowr far the performance has anſwered the 


15 n muſt be left to others to judge; yet thus much may toi th rruth be affirmed, 


e jucceſs upon ore years trial has been ſicb, bert it har been rightly ujeds 


lh proves that the meaſures have not altogether been mi lalen; for the con- 
ation of which, I refer myſelf (which is all that with modeſty I can do) ta the 
W/erience of thoſe that have tried it, or to any man's ocum eyes that will candidly 
and ſee ; but I appeal from the ** of thoſe that jadge befirs:cbey try. 
| 2 is 


ö 


P * 
; N 2 p 5; r : I 5 
. — W $a r — 
* 1 = 4 


WM fuch indeed it will not be credible, that children of ſeven or eight years of 


Nerd, and the Memory in retaining it. In which Vocabulary care is tal; 


The Preface. EY 


p : 12 ; d. . . * * * 1 * N * ; g 
— — —qy— ——— PR API AEAL He 


= 
(6 
by 


that 
age ſhould within the firſt year not only have in readineſs in their heads, a Vo- tie 8 
cabulary of almoſt all the primitive uſual words, and know. to which part they llectun 
belong, be able to form off all Participles from any Verb, and to decline readily fe tell 
any declinable word in the Number, Caſe, Mood, Tenſe, or Perſon called for, i be 1 
but make an infinity of ſhort plain Sentences (even as many as may be made of und th 
the words in the Vocabulary) without recurring to a Dictionary, in true, plat 45 add 
Latin, and in a ſhort time after run through the Latin Grammar and the plain. 
eſt parts of Corderius with enſe and delight, yet this we have frequently ſeen ; 
ſo great is the difference between ſetting people to work with and without Tool: 
and Materials, or between driving them with a whip through thick and thin, 
ever bills and dates, precipices and flumbling-blocks in the dart, and leading 
them by the hand through the pleaſanteſt and moſt ſurprizing preſpects in open 
i, - light $45 Oy F ; 
* T wnld have it remembred that this Book is but the firſt of four or five 
deſigned to comprehend the whole of what is needful for Scholars, to prepare them * 
to converſe to the beſt advantage with any good Authors of the three tongues, and 


and to become ſuch themſelves, and pretends only to lay the foundations and eſta- 2% am 
bliſh the ground-work, upon which the other in their order are to ſuperſtruct; and le #9 4 
foundations, tho they ſhould be ſolid, yet are neceſſarily rude, Here is given only gr ed / 
& general ſcheme, and the leading Rules, many particularities, many more 66- muſt b. 


ſervabler, exteptions, anomalies, &c. are here omitted which will find their place! umb. 


and time hereafter. It was not therefore intended that this ſhould be a full and in tha 
perfect Grammar, there is need of a longer time, more age, and a greater unact- wich, 
fanding for that; nor know I any thing more fooliſh than the prepoſterous haſſi . 7. 7 
of filling Childrens heads with what they are not yet in capacity to apprehend, ſimple 

retain, or apply to preſent uſe. And if 1 be any thing in this Book that mj N 
feem better deferr'd, I would adriſe that the learner be directed to tip it. Fr lipſes 


all that was here intended is, ill the 


1. Togive ſo many Exempleg as were judged neceſſary to give light to th 8. 7 
Rules and to dired the practice apan them. 7 he Lea: 
2. To propoſe Rules true, plain and directive, but thoſe only the main 4 Rey 6k 
general ones, hich being but ſew, are yet uch as that to them all that is | 2 78 
follow hereafter may be referred and reduced without change in the Method. 5 7 12 


mean all farther Obſervables, 40l Irregularities and Exceptions, all Var 
tions, &c. and to add ſuch Explications aud Limitations only as the preſen 
defign required. | | | ; 
3. To make the Exerciſes and Imitationg / egg and /o many, as mig!” 
certainly introduce an habit of performing every operation arigbt. 1 

4: To digeſt under every part of Speech a Vocabulary of the Words belongi. 
to it, in ſuch order as might beſt aſſiſt the Jadgment in the true meaning of !' 11, 25 55 


a | png 
N .. 1 a 


that only tbe moſt uſual Wards may appear, and thoſe moſtly Primitive, - 1: 
defign that from them here firſt learned, might in the next Book be orderly des 


ced all their Derivatives and Compounds, by plain and ſure Rules, 2. 
will, beyond imagination, facilitate the knowledge of the whole body of word 
the Latin Tongue : as ſor inſtance, after they bauye learned here what doct oo If any 
lectum, auditum, ad all the other Supines /ignify, and thes have a Rule 7 und be 


The Preface, 


———— 


2 from the firſt Supine by — um into or ts — a Noun Subtan- 
tive which ſignifies the Doer, as from doctum to teach, doctor a teacher: 
N Pedun to read, lector a reader ; will not a boy 'of the meaneſt capacity be able 
55 1 tell what auditor, emptor, creator, ſervator, and all the reſt ſignify ? So 
« " he by this Book know what ducere, pellere, trahere, vocare, &. fgnifies ; 
and then in the next that ad when compounded ſignifies to, pro forth, re back,&e. 
Zas adducere to bring to, producere to bring forth, reducere 10 bring bath, will 
7 "be not eafily proceed to tell at firſt fight what adtrahere, protrahere, retrahere, 
* advocare, provocare, revocare, advolare, provolare, revolare; adgredi, pro- 
gredi, regredi, &c. fignify ? and of what they are compounded ? 
„ 5 To cauſe the ſame words to be fetched over again in the Genders, Compari- 
Sons, Declenſions, Conjugations, and Syntactict Rules, to keep them and all their 
| Accidents and Declinations in ne, and Jo fix them that T9 be in ns dan- 


6. To ſetile every thing in its proper place: for I can't be of their opinion, 
en 4 that think there is no need of an exact method in teaching, or that in ſpelling 
Fand it's no great matter whether the child be taught to begin'witha or nord; 
or am T able to judge any thing more irrational and perplexing, than to ſet peo 
ple to do that firſt, which cannot be done till ſome other thing that is preſup- 
| ta it be done; as for exemple, to tell the Learner, That the Adjective 
muſt be made to agree with its Subſtantive in the ſame Caſe, Gender, and 
Number, and require him to practiſe upon it, while as yet he has no knowledge 

in what Caſe the Sabine ought to ve pat which the Adjective is to yy 
. with, &c. 

7. Jo keep every word in its natural order, and the Sentence in its plain and 
ſimple dreſs, and not to omit ſo much as ego, or tu, or homo, &c. nor to 
oy 1 rranſpoſe any word until the Learner be capable of knowing why and when fich 

Fl Ellipſes and Tranſpoſitions may be made; nor to interpoſe a double Sentence 

fill the nature and make of ſingle ones be perfectly learned. _ 

8. To circumſcribe and define the limits and bounds of the Tongue, and ſhew 
be Learner his ſtages, and the utmoſt goal, that he may ſee his taurſe and iti 
ud, and know what words may and what may not be put together; than which 
1 Frothing is more needful to be done. 
d. [ One thing I have been told of, as going too far out of the common road, cohich 
get I cannot prevail with myſelf to alter, and that is the beginning at the Per 
Infinite, and firſt laying down diſtinctiy the three principal endin gs 3 ; via. the 
Infinite fgxi/ying Imperfectly, the Finite ignifying Perfectly, and the Supine, 
. from thence deducing ſeverally the Perſons, Tenſes, &c. fignifying Imper- 


1 5 41, and then thoſe [i egnifying Perfectly, &c. for this appears ſo patural even 
1 them that have not obſerved it, that aur Conſtruers engliſh vocito to call, ni- 
reo to be black; and our Diftionary-makers ſay, to have amo, aud to do 3g0, 
4 ' rh which are falſe; this way ſo plainly diſtinguiſpes the Conjugations, and 
a 


Pos occaſion for the diſtin declining of the Imperte& and Perfect Tenſes (tha 


„ E@rfounding of 2ohich Varro ſomewhere de LL. I remember juſtly blames) and 
den Wriates ſo many miſtakes of our Latin-makers, that I could not forbear fullowing 
* e great Comenius ix it, as judging that nothing was coanting to bring it to 
FAIR 


T ö evail over all the other ways, but to ſhew the benefits of it. 
am aft how it may be uſed to the ” advantage, the way that tos hare 


6 . —_— 7 &3. i. 


The he Preface. 


1. To read ta the child fa E an woe iudee fit at a time, and to require him | - 1 
to. read it Mer us with exatineſi, well obſerving the quantity, accent, &c. 
of every Syllable, and marking it with a Pen obere need i bs, and continue * * 1 
till it 7 ws longer 7 1 

2. Yo explain it, and b ” Hiller Queſtions make Lim ah en the way | BY 
and uſe of each part, and without rigour trying &is Memory, and MN him ” 
'by prompting him with the Engliſh, &c. .% 

3. To put him upon getting all that perfectly by heart which is oaſis but + 
2 Imitations are only to be u by word of mouth from the one Language 9 
the oil er. WW 

4. Do bring bin 720% to ar ite legibly, that for his daily exerciſes; in 2 1 
out of School he may on his foul Book aorite out Exemples of each Declenſion and 
Conjugation, and Compariſons, and then proceed to the Exemples of the Syntax; 
which when and as they are daily corrected ſhould be copied fairly into another 
Book, to be kept by them and Heron to their friends for their ſatigfaction, for tb 
Maſter's credit and the Boy's encouragement. A 

To conclude, take the reaſon and end of a School to bt great ard ſublime, © 
it is no leſs:than the regular management of Youth by Power, Wiſdom, and 
Goodnels, under good diſcipline, and the inſtructing, exercifing%and habitu a+ | 
ting them to'all that they are to know, will or do while in that flate, and to © 
all that may be of uſe to them in their future life, fo that they may come out © 
of the School, prepared for all that Duty they have ta de towaras God, men, 3 
or themſelves. T 

Aud it is a very great truſf that is repoſed | in Maſters, and there: 14 ack of 3 
a great many good qualifications in one that undertakes a charge upon which ſo 
much depends; and no 5kill, care or pains can be too much in him who is bound 45 
by all obligations, 7 

I. To keep the glorious End 408 in his and his charges eye. 4 
II. To ſearch out diligently, and uſe reſolutely, tbe ſure Me ang that eoill 
Ry lead to, and gain the End. by: 

III. To fudy and apply the readieſt, plaines, and eafreft Mays and 
Methods / / Hing the/e means, that the defigned End may certainly le 
attained by all that refuſe not to follow them. _ >... 
This is the ſumm of our work, and this I think we ſboull look upon as b X 
common intereſt and concern to advance, that while ather Arts and Sciences are 

daily improving and gaining r perfection, ours only lie not in its firſt 8 
rudiments. is 

What I have been doing this way has been only in reſpect ta the publick good, 
and from a dgfire to be fome way ſerviceable to my Country. If any good be done . 
T have my end ; and if any like nat this Eſſay, WP may Pre 40 let it alan, 
and there s no hurt done, * 


From Win 
in ny: 


N 5, 
bY” 
_ - 


4 * 


n. 


ACCIDEN 


Q R. A Nu 


NTRODUCTION 


INTO THE 


0 H A p 1 E R I. 
Nee. the Latin Letters, 


ARE 


Queſtion, Ow many are the Letters OT in the Latin Tongue” 2 
by I. Anſwer. The Latin Letters are two and twenty. 
The 22 Letters in Great Characters 
ABCDEFGHI vr JEMNOPQRSTU or VXTZ, 
The 22 Letters in Small Characters, 
a bedefg h i or jIImnopqr forst u or 112. 
Q. How are theſe jones two Letters divided ? 
2. 4. Letters are divided into Vowels and Conſonants. 
Q. What is a Vowel ? 
3. 4. A Vowel is a Letter, w which is a full and We ſound of itſeli 
Pithout a, Conſonant. 
2. How mam Letters be Vowels ? 
4 4. Theſe fix Letters, a, e, i, o, u, y, are Vowels. 
Axe the ſix Vowels always pronounced with the ſame length ? 
5 A. The fix Yowels are ſometimes proncuaced ſhort, and lometimes 


-_— 


mad is ſhore, met is ſhort . © fan is ſhort, - 
Hrs «in {at is long, „ get is long, i in = fiend is long, 
Fro is ſhort, cur is ſhort, | . { hypocrite is ſhorr, 


010 «in 


cure is long, WA. le! is long. 
4 4 Q. How 


obe is lon 8. 


8 Ok Letters and Syllables. Chap. II. 
ow may 4 Toorwer know when they are ſhort, and when E | 
* A. In this Book, where it is needful, 2 15 — 1 
The ſhort Vowel ſhall be marked rhus 50 as 88, vir, per. TS 
The long Vowel ſhall be marked thus (a) as 0s, ver, par. * 
Q. Is there then ſuch care to be taken about the length of the Vowels ? © 
J. A. Yes, a moſt exact care is to be taken, 2Q 
1. That here · ever a Vowel is ſhort, it be ſtill-pronounced ſhorr, as 1 
miles, eques, 6, Eft, & ec. which you mult not pronounce milts, ꝭquẽs, s el. 15 
2. That where-ever a Vowel is long, it be pronbunced long, as os, 
mis, möõs, honõs, jus, amãs, Ge. which you muſt not pronouficegos, ws, F 
mos, hates; j Jus, ams. 5 
Q. Now #ry how you can privounte the ela in theſe, dõcẽs, dnss, 
pater, parere, pirers, parere, sũs, virtus, ciichlits, — umbiſ cüs, 
_ velox, præcöx, felix, f ilix, f ix, audix, 08x, rex, 4 
Q What in 4 Conſonant ? 
8. A. A Conſonant is a Letter, that is to be founded I a Vowel, 
Q. How many Conſonants are there? 
9. A. The other ſixteen Letters be Conſonants, b, c FF cc. 
Q Nm tell me which of theſe be Vowels, and which Cinſonants, 


e, f, g, 2, l, m, o, n, r, i, p. 5, t, u, y. 


TFT 
Of Sab „ 


Hat is 10 be dme with theſe Letters 2 
10. A, The uſe of theſe Letters is to make Mann 
Q. Haw many Letters go 20 make a Syliable ® 
11, A. J. Sometimes one Letter makes a Syllable; as, a, e. i, o, u, N. 
II. Sometimes two Letters go to the making of a Syllable'; ; as, | : 
LWV 10.. 00. v0. yh... . 0 
6kj5„ 42. 2». - Su 4 
N. „ R 1. Theſe Syllables, æ, œ, ai, ei, oi, au, eu, are called Dipthongs 
2. luſtead of æ and & we commonly pronounce 4 | | 
ba be bi bo bu by. 
a” W.N ou” oy, 
III. Sometimes three Letters go to make a Sy nable; as | 
bab beb bid bob bub byb. J dad ded did dod 78 64% 
car cer eir cor cur cyr. rs res, r ret W Is. 
IV. Some Syllables conſiſt of four Lerters ; 4%, part, pain, flar, fe, J, 4 
ful, ſoul, reft, waſt, hart, &c. * 
V. Some Syllables confiſt of five Letters; as, mouiit, ain, bj ing, fan 
trip, fart, quar', print. ; 2 
VI. * there are ſix Letters in one Syllable; a5, ſtript, from R 
| 7 fo ought, caught, fright, bright, NK. 0 
Now tell me how many Letters are in each of theſe Sylables : All vel 
love and praile Fe Child, That minds his hook, and loves to learn. 


e 4 


F 


& & 


. Pop. uw. iv. Ok the Eight parts of Speech: 5 


1 enar m | 
by a 15 ep Concerning M. orde. 
@ TY 7 Het is to be done with the Sylabſes : 
as 12. A. The uſe of Syllables is to make Words. 


ſt.. Q How many Syllables go to make a Word ? 

s 13. 4. I. Sometimes one Syllable makes a Word; , man, bat, can, 

b, Mud, death, wiſe, fool, calf, horſe, aſs. 

1 II. Sometimes two Syuables go to make a Word; as, wo- man, fa-ther, 

& | o- ther, ma · ſter, ſo- ber, wiſ dom, plen- ty. 

is, III. Sometimes three Syllables are in one Word; ; AS, ra- ci · dus, god-li-nefs, 
#-e-?7, ſo-ber-nef, un-worthy, - | 
lv. Some Words are made of four Syllables; as, ſo-bri-e-ty, cor-rec-th-on, 

| Peace-e ble-nefſs, cha- ri · ta · ble, un-mer-ci-fal, 
V. Some Words conſiſt of fe Syllables ; as, ex · com· mu ni cate; par- 
3 | lar ly, ma-gi-ſte-ri- . | 
VI. Sometimes ſix Syllables go ro make a Word; as, pteri-fi-ca-ti-on, 
fan-Si-fi-ca-t.-on, j1-fti-fi-ea-ti-on, &c. 
F Q. In each of theſe Words following tell me how many SYlables are there: 
8 es Children will perpetually hearken to the Inſtructions of their * 

d will be obedient to the Commands of their Maſters. 


c 7 the Eight Party of Sacha or, of the eight farts 7 
* © Words which Men uſe 1 in Ne OT 


„. Hat are Words uſed for ? 

as, 14. 4. Men uſe Words to expreſh end ane che Hodghes 

F their mind, when they fpeak : for we often need to ſigniſy our theughes 
others, and they cannot know our Thoughts but by our Speech. 

gs. Q What then is our Speech made up x fit fi 
15. 4. When we ſpeak to expreſs our Thoughts, our Th > h made 
Up of Words, and therefore Words are called Parts of Speech. | 
Q. In our Speech bow many Parts are theres 

= 15, 4. In Speech be theſe Eight Parts following, - 


1d. % I. A Man. 5. An Adverb. 


58.7 2. A Pronoun. 6. A Cmjunchion. 
4 „ee 7. A Prepoſition. 
*. 4. A Participle. JC. 8. An Inter jection. 


Jt What mean you when you ſay there are Eight Parts of Speech? 

1 17. A. I mean that there are Eight ſts of Words which Men uſe when 
UN 4 they ſpeak; for ſome Words are Ncuns, ſome are Pronouns, ſumeare Verbs, 
bers are Participles, others are Adverbs, other Words are ConjunBions, 
1 © (hers Prepoſitions, and others are Interjectionc. 
8 Are there no other ſ.rts of N Wards uſed in ſpeaking * $28 230 1 

"of | | 18. 4 There 


ap · V 


1 "Df k Keim. "1 th me 
———— 
18. A. There are no other kind of Words uſed ; for every Word which, 
Men uſe in ſpeaking is either a Noun, of a Pronoun, or a Verb, or a Particl8 * 
ple, or an Adverb, or a Cnjunct ion, or a Prepoſit in or elſe an Interjection. 
Q. Do you not defire to know which words are "—_— which are Pronouns 0 Z 
and which Verbs, c.? 0 V, 
4. Yes, Sir, 1 would gladly Kooks | if f you 0 to teach me. 4 "i wy 
pd K muon 2 . a Noun. | ie? e ee me 
4 1 inge 
Jai is a Noun? H hath it 
19. A. A Noun is the Name of a thive; that my be ſeen or ſign 
felt, heard, or underſtood ;- as, 


The Name of this {An Hand and in the La- n. A - 
+ thing which here 97 Houſe 8 Tongue he He . G4 

es in Engliſh is A Man, J Name ot it is H6mg. the Worla 
I ada ite muy |  C Good | Buds. a part 

is called in and in I. 
1 So this Engliſh Ba nad Latin Ma: 2. or membe 
* Lee Is. 28. E 

© What Wird, then are Nouns? Ne 


20. 4. All thoſe Words are Nuns, that are the Names of ing 
Q. Hiw many kinds of Nouns are there? 
21. 4. There are two. forts of Nouns; for. of Nuns ſome be Subſtan f 
Fives, and tome be Adject ves. | 
X E What is a Nourr Subſtantive ? | I | 
22. A. A Noun Subſtantive is that Name of. a. thing that « can a ſtand by it moving 
ſelf in a ſaying, and requireth not an AdjeJive to be joined to it to n f e 
2 2 : as 4 Man, Homo; a Maſter, Magiſter ; 4 Parent, Parens. . 
QA can un male it appear that theſe are Subſtancives ? 4 . All \ 
23. A. Becauſe if one ſay, I ſee a Man, or 1 ſee the Maſter, or f the? 
Parent ; in each ſaying the ſenſe is plain and full, and I underſtand ite . : 
by my without an Adjedive added to it. | 3 from 4 
bat ig a Noun Adjective? 3 * 
24. A. A Noun Adjedtive is that Name of- a thing, that cannot _ bi 
irſelf in a ſaying, but requireth a Subſtantive, to which it may be. Rac 
to make ſenſe ; as, god, bonus; Hay, felix ; white, albus. 151 
Q Make it clear, that theſe and ſuch like Words cannot fland alone ! ink 
Saying 2 
235. 4 If any one 7. 1 ſee a 50. or I ſee an happy, or 1 ſee a ny 
in theſe Sayings there is no good ſenſe, nor do we underſtand the meaning by 
of them, but chere needs to be put in a Subſtantive ro each AdjeFive 0 ö L kind. 
make ſenſe; as, I ſee a«good Boy, I ſee a happy Man, I fee 4 wh te Har ſe. © 
Qn theſe Sayings following tell me wich Nouns are SubNappyes, 4 
which. are Ad jectives, and the reaſon why ? 4 
The Maſter fent a Leiter. The Ape cats Apples. Thar i is a mad © * 
The writes a gh, The Man builds an Mauſe. This is a ſober ee 
A wiſe learns his B) K. We love ſweet © VNorſes drink Wat 


5.1. 


© i * 


$1, The 


| ue 


RY 


vi 2 — Nouns: Subſfaririves. | 117 
N # wth» — — PIN : | - 
cf — 


* 1. A VOCABULARY. 
” or, Erh, of Nouns Subſtantive, moſt] 4 Privttiie 


7 * B. Here follow the Engliſh and Latin Names of things moſt tamil 


to Children. 85 
7 26. Every 
1 Thing. Nes Ei f. 
hath its name nomen Inis n. 
nl er hen. fignam In. „ 
| 7 A Thing is 
God ef (1 DEzr tm. 


2 World mund i m. 

a part of it pars tis f. 

or member, membrum i u. 
28, Beſides which there i K 

Ver _——__ -nihIlumin. 


b. Things in the World age 


© ſpirit | ſpirir#s ũs m. 
45005 cor pas Oris n. 


oving liver hy 
creature. Pf animai alis n. 


it 


* 1 


D. All which things have their 


2 cauſa æ f. 
ut ure natüra æ f. 
une for:ana æ f. 
4 ſial⸗ is d. 


gr, The nature of things is in 
1 their 
mãter la æ f. 
forma æ f. 
mods i m. 
gend Ecis n. 


"A 


We | . | temp#s öris n. 


erer St 
and number. 


3 S9 . - TIT ans 
i 


gerd- mis my: 3) 
QUmeErus i m. 


an hour höræ æ f. 
4 dy dizs Gi d. d > 
a mont. mens/s is m. 

a year anni 
an age. secũlum 1 0. 5 

In a day is 
the ae aurora a f. 
the morning mãge n. 
the evening veſpeſ is m. 


the nig ut nox As . 


35 The dap after this i: 


fo morrow. crãs n. 5 


5 * 4 


36. In a year are 


the ſpring ver is n. 

the ſummer ler e ON 
autumn _ autimnzZs i m. 
the winter hlems is f. 


Of Spirits. _ 
37. A Spirit is 


an angel ang El i m. 
4 mind mens tis f. 
Z or Jnimas i m. 
4 ſoul ß Anima æ . 
à devil. CLOPILS A 
Of Bodies. 
38. The greater Bodies are 
Heaven Caœlim in. 


the 


1 
1 


Nouns n 92 


YO 


e 


the 5bie ther Eris 1 m. —"(th3" deen Sc n i m. 
the air er kris m, ia abe ; Voſs 21. 
t be earth tellzs üris * 


The wat, \ Ique 2 f. 


39. Bodies in the Ski a aye 


the ay «1 is m. 
#he moon lona æ f. 

a ſtar.” ſtella æ f. 

40. From which come 

4 beam jübär is n. 
light lux cis f. 

a fue jgnis is m. 
4 fame flammaæ f. 


1. When light is with-held 
there 15 made 


4 ſhadow... unibra æ f. 


darkneR. . 
42. by Fire are made 


4 e tor ri is m. 

« live oa prune æ f. 

@ dead coal carb önis m. 

aſhes. | eini- Eris” 7 
- einèr is * | 


43- hh the Air is 


renEbr2 ãrum pl.f. 


4 ſteam vapzr Oris m. 
4 ſmoke _ tomzs i m. 
a cloud © nubzs is f. 
4 wind venta i m. 
0 thunderbolt fulmès lais n. 
ot — 
44+ Water is 
a2 gutta 2 f. 
6 few? 7 t (is m. 
a ſpring fons tis m. 
4 Mer rivis i m. 


or amn is m. 
läica: ns. WE 


a lake 
6 ſes 


. 


—— 


A l e gläciz / ei f. 
ſnow nix vis f. 
ba grande Inis f. 
46. Of Water is made 
. a bubble bulla-z f. 
4 pam ſpuma z f. 
- @ ſhower, imber ris m. 
Of Earth. 
47. Earth is 
land terra æ f. 
ground himzs i f. 
firm. gromd lum i n. 4 
duſt pulvis 4 


a brink. margo inis d. 
a bank ripe æx f. 
4 ſhore litus ör is n. 3 
50. Wpon rhe Earth is 
a plain field cam pus im. 
4.4 vale or vally vallis is f. 1. 
L hill - collis is m. 4 
4 mountain mon- wo m. 4 | 


Chap. if 4 bp. V. 


Re» p (een Water. i is 


or pulv&r-is m. > 
48. Earth mixt with Water 


a diamon 


| dirt © 


cœ¹m i n. 1 
mud  Timwus im. 1 ſap bir 
clay lũütum i n. 


49. Land 1 Water ſide 


* o 
* 4 4 


Ext are 


mirłra æ 1 
planta æ f. 


4 e 
a plant 


I 2 ; 


uns Siibſtantive. 


13 
a 2 
"Of Minerals. | 59. Dr Torn 
55. A Pineral i is a ſtanding crop is teges cb. * 
Al is m. oven. by 55 
alũnien Inis n. 69. In Corn! wy 
mEtilum in. "tbe flaſk caulis is m. 
apa idis m. the ear e233... 
th: grain granum i n. 
3- Wetals are * 
plumbum i n. | 
ferrum | in. | Of Shrubs. 
Zs ris u. . : 
argentum i n. 61, A Shrub is 
aur uin i n. 4 cane canna f. 
| | à reed cãlãmus i m. 
ca. A Stone is or Aründo Inis f. 
1 1 z f. | a roſe-buſh roſa & f. 
ſax i a vine vĩtis is f. 
lle icis-d. | we! _ 
& pumice phinzx cis d. | F 
| nmarble marmor -is n. | Of Trees. | 
# cryſtal . cryſtallg i t. : 
4 jewel gemma 2 f. 62. A Tree is 
er n an Apple tree mals i f. 
1 55. A Jewel is + year: trig . 
. | pyru ii. 
4 diamond * 3 a cherry-tree eeraſus i f. 
© ſap; hire ſapphirus i a fig tree fic us f. 
' ruby rubinus i m. a bay tree laur us us or i fo 
3 e __ | a box-tree . 
à cedar cedrw if. 
Of Plants. | an 15 e 4 — 
A Won 8 1X 61s . 
56. APlant 15 
herba æ f. 


früter icis m. 
arbör -is f. 
57. Ap Yerb is 
grameén Inis n. 3 
Papaver 1s u. 


HMaumin. 
frax 818 F 


58. Corn is 
 tiabaz f. 

pĩſum i n. 

- avena x f. 


Adör -is n. 


ö 


63. Trees growing toge- 


ther make 
4 wood filvaz f. 
4 foreſt © nEmus öris n. 
4 | lucus i m. 


64. The parts of Plants 


arc 


the root radix cis f. 
the ſtumd ſtirps is f. 
10 She | — ramus i m. 
th: wood lignum in. 


65. In 


py EZ 


4 les frons dis f. \ 
| «rh 470 td ium i n. 
4 bloſſm or flower flos-ris m. 
the fruit fructus os. m. 
Of Fruits. 
66. Fruit are 
4 cucumber - clictimeEr -is m. 
& melon melõ nis m. 
4 pome _ pomun n. 
4 nut nir cis f. 
4 berry bacca æ f. 
67, A Pome is 
an apple mãlum i n. 
a bear Pyrum un. 
4 cherry ctraſum i n. 
a plum prunum i n. 
a fig ficũ / ũs or i f. 


68. A Perry is 


an olive Oliva æ f. 
4 2 frigum 1 n. 
4 grape uva æ f. 


69. Plants FECL from 


Nouns Subffantive. 


65. * a Bough are A 


| 


5 Jeed - $Emen inis n. 
Of live Creatures 
. An Animal i is 
an inſeF  , , inſeQumin, 
a worm + verms is m. 
a ſerpent ſer pen: tis d. 
4 fiſh piſcu is m. 
a bird + avis is ſ. 
a beaft beſtiaz f. 
4 man homo inis c. 
71. In al which there js 
life vĩta æ f. 
ſenſe feaſ ns m. 
{ex ſexiis ũs m. 


* * 11 OE. 


7. Things perceived * 


lenſe are 
ſound Non i i m. 
or vice vox cis f. 
colour colyr 5 
taſte or reliſh sipir C =... 
ſmell | öder Cn m 


Pain or ęref dolor 


73- By its Sex an Animal | 


a dragon draco Onis m, 
a viper or adder viperaz f. 


_> 4 = —_ Co at. 


— 


Of Fiſhes. 
77. River-fiſhes are 
a bench tincazf. 
a perch perca æ f. 
a freut trutta æ f. 
a ſalmon ſalmo õnis m. 


r 


78. Ses 


© v 
7 


14 


a 


is | 45 175 
4 male mas Aris m- ſmallon 
or a female temina æ f. 4 | pigeon 
| G partrid, 
74. A Female brings forth © rave 
aun one poullus i, m. | 154) 
| Or elle an egg Ovun i n. eagle 
— — ow! 
Of Inſects. 80. 
75 . An Inſcet ie” 77 we 
4 louſe pedictilus i m. I capon 
4 flea pulez. icisd. BY 7 
a flie muſca æ f. 81. 
à bee Apis is f. Kenſe, 
4 waſp velpaz f. 4 duck 
4 locuſt I&caſta æ f. Zee, 
9 5 —— 82. 
Of Serpents. ö FH eat her 
| | 4 
76. A Serpent is 4 wing 
a ſnake anguis is d. 3 


"4 


2 y. — Subſtantive. Is 
"78. Sea-fiſhes are" | calf viel, 
1 balæuna æ f. 1 7 | 1 cr 
a. delphin -is m, | © 4 " 15 61 * 
W herring. halec -is f. n. mn "wi 5 min e 
ele SSleazf. * SC. *  Porcus i m. 
4 £2 oltrea æ f. 4 goab caper ri m: 
A — 1 85. A company of theſe ; is 
VE of Birds or Fowls. | it 1 
= 79. Birds are 86. Working cattle are 
. . 1 154 bullock | bõ dvis c. 
* ** r 0 5 | an Hor ſe us i m. 
# pigeon colambus im. | an = 3 i m. 
Tie perd ĩx cis d. | a mule mais i m. 
raven corvus im. | 4 camel camel i m. 
L 4444 phaſhanys i m. an elephant ElEphas ntis m- 
tur | | 


* turtũr · is m. 
In eagle Aquila æ f. 
＋ owl bübo önis m. 


30. Tame Fowls are 
1 "TN © gallwi m. 
ben gallina æ f. 
1 8 capon” cã po Onis m. 
81. Water-fowls are 
Letele antèr-is m. 
a duck anis tis f. 
4 given vlor -Oris m. 


82. To Birds belong 


g plũma æ f. 
Aa penna æ f. 
wine als æ hy 


on 

W 

"3% 28 — 
37 


Ot Beaſts, 0 


* Beaſts about the houſe 
are 

canis is c. 

felis is m. 


8 * * 2 
3 


< +». Rn 
he BS 
7 5 


mũ, ris m. 
184 Cattle Pecis dis f. 
4 4 bull raurigs i m. 


Vaeca à . 


87. Mild- beats are 


4 ſtag cervm i m. 
à buck or doe dam æ d. 
an hare lè pas dt is m. 
a mole talpa æ d. 
a frog rana æ 1. 
88. Bave nous beaſts are 
4 lion les õnis m. 
4 bear ur ſus i m. 
a wolf Tapas i m. 
a fox vulpes is f. 
89. Beafig have 
| ſome an born corna u n. 
ſome a ſnout © roſtrum i u. 
ſome 4 tail cauda æ 


90. On Beaſts is either 


hair or ſhag pilus i m. 
| or wool Jana æ f. 
or briſtle eta æ 1. 
| « Mane bez "| 
a lock cõma æ ſ. 
| a beard. barba a fa 


o 
* 
. . 


— dung Subſtanitide, _- vi ap. 
f — — 
The Parts of the Body, 99. In the Trunk of the be. 
eſpecially of Mans. Body are 
the fore-part — : | 
92. The Parts of the Bode the back-part rergum in. 
are the ſide - , Lirzs Eris 02. 
the bead cip#t iris n. ö 100. In the fore. part are 
the trunk truncaa i m. te breaſt pectis Sris n. 
a limb artus ũs m. ” 12 2 X venter ris m. 
3 . mamma æ f. I : 
©1673. In the Yead are 33 F_— 
the n vertes chm. , In the back part are — 
the hair crinis is m. | fe ider bümera im. 
5 or cipills im. the mid-back dorſumin 08, Þ 
the ear auris is f. the buttock. ' nat's is f. =: 
the face Tacies e ei t. ; 102. The Limbs are 1 904 
2 mh, the hind © minus bs f. 4 
924. In the Face are | the foot 1 " _ 
the countenance vulttis 0s m. | the leg 1 EE PAW * A 
the forehead ftrons tis t. Io. 
— — Sees d m | I p arts of the Fand are 010 
the mſe naſs i m. the arm brachium n.. MK... 
the mouth Os ris n. the fiſt, Pugnus i m. Miele 
the chin © mentum i n. e palm, palma æ f. 47 
| the thumb pollex icis m. . * 
2 95. In the Gye is | a finger ; digitus i 1 m. 2 5 
4 tea, Acryma e f. 104. Parts of the Foot are 
| "Pp ; : the thigh. ___ f&miir ors, n. 3 
96. To the Mouth belong 1 the Knee genu u n. \ th 
re i _  * Iblwin, the leg. erũs tis n. 85 
1 or librum i n. the beef . ene 
the outfer chrek gene 2 t. 105. Ii all which parts are 110. A 
97. Within the Pouth are 120 : Clitfs is f. = - 
the roof 5 pälãtum i In. 4 bone © 8 8 the 
the inner ch:e& bucca æ f. "ae; bans =: Mo 
the tongue | lingua P f. BY vein ee ; of M. 
The gum gingiva æ f. e = 4 
the chap. faux cis f | 106. The Inwards are , 
the throat - gurtfir -is u. the brain certbrum i n, oF” 
2 5 k cor dis n. hy 
98. Between the Head and | the lungs or lights palm õnis m. 4 
Drunk are | "oliver ©" et Sin a. 
AD Shu 4 | 5 ſpleen ſplea- N. | plead 
the throttle jũgülum in. 0 D Fid, NS Taku 4 11. A 
e crag ceryis cis f. | oe OT A m. _ nc 
FT 1% cis t. the bladder vexicg a 4. Word + 


+ 


1 * hap. V. 


Nouns Subſtantibe. 


17 


The Bones. 
107. The Bones are 
1 ul. crãnlum i n. 
4 b» cheek-bone milazf, 

"$3010 dens tis m. 
@ rib coſta æ f. 
be ſhin bone tibiae f. 


1247 or clay unguis is m. 


— 


| The Humours. 
108. Yumours in the Body 


oy are 
00d ſanguls nis m. 
[ ik lac cis n. 

10 fel lis n. 


109. Extrements to be caſt 
forth of the Body are 


sũdiy gris m. 
säliva æ f. 
Pas ris n. 
ür ina æ f. 
ſtercus öris n. 


| 1 eat 

wttle 
atter 
p Wine 


07 the Affections and Diſ- 

= eaſes. 

e j 110. Animals are affected 
1 with 
desiderium i n. 
tames is f. 

9 '$iris is f. 

1 Amr öris m. 


Fred .odium in. 
per ira æ f. 
gaud lim i n. 
ſpẽs Ei f. 


tmr öris m. 


* 1 
ar- eat. meètz ũs m. 


1 1. And 1 are Cubject to 
p vuln s Eris n. 


— 


à diſeaſe 
death 


| a cough 


the drop ſie 


Ho or meat 


| drink 


. 


morbu i m. 
mor, tis f. 


112. Dileaſes are 


tuſl's is f. 


an ague or fever febris is f. 


hydrops is m. 


113. While Animals are free 
from Diſeaſes they are in 


health, welfare sälũs tis f. 
| firength 


robzr oris n. 


114. For their maintenance 
there is 


proviſion or plenty copla æ f. 


Cibzs i m. 
pots us m. 


a grown woman 
an old woman 


a father 


à mother 


a ſon 

a daughter 

a brother 

a ſiſter 

a grand fat ber 
a grand- child 
a father-in-law 
& On- in-law 


4 giant 


Of Of Man, his age, at kin- 


dred. 
115. Man by his age is 
a byy or lad pier i m. 
a girl or laſs puella æ f. 
a virgin virgo inis f. 
a grown man vilr im. 


Ans us f. 


116. A man by his dine 
is 


Pater ris m. 
maczx, ris f. 
filius 1m. 
fiiiiz f. 
{rater ris m. 
SOrzr Oris f. 
Avas im. 


" nEpOs tis m. 
" SOCEr -im. 
gener -im. 


"2 = A min too big: is 


giga: ntls m. 
A 


18 


— Nouns Subſtantive. Chap. vi be 
A Man too little 1s Rebecca | Redbece ef. | 
4 dwar | ümilio onis m. Sarah Sara # 
| 7 N 5 5 Suſan Suſanna æ f. 
— —— — — |. | 


Proper. Names. 


118. Proper Names of 
Men are 


Adam Adamus i m. 
Abraham '  Abrabamus i m. 
Anthony Antonius i m. 
Benjamin Benjaminas 1 m. 
Charles Carolus i m. 
Chriſtopher Chriftsphorusi m. 
Daniel Daniel -is m. 
David © David »is m. 
Edward Edvardus i m. 
Francis Franciſcus i m. 
George Georgius i m. 
Henry Henricus im. 
James Jacobus i m. 
John Toannes is m. 
Luke Lucas æ m. 
Mark Marcus 1 m, 
Matthew Matthzus i m. 
Paul Paulus i m. 
Peter - PeErrus i m. 
Richard Richardus i m. 
Robert Roberta: i m. 
Samuel Sambiel -is m. 
Thomas Thomas æ m. 
William  Gulielmus i m. 
119, Prope Names of 
Women are 
Ann 2 Anna æ f. 
Barbara Bärbära æ f. 
Catharine Catharina æ f. 
Dorothy ' Dorothea æ f. 
El xabeth Elizabẽtha æ f. 
or Betty or Eliza æ f. 
Ze ra kf. 
Hannab Hanna æ f. 
r Joir 2 f. 
Joan oanna æ f. 
Martha Martha æ f. 
Mary Naria æ f. 


| | 


125. That they may do 0 


2 , —— 


Forth 
Acts of the Creatures. Mou. 
120. That theſe Creutures 

may act they have is 

a power or force vis is f. gory 


bel or means Gps is f. goin 
aid auxlllum in. 1.5 
e Ol 
121. the uſual manner of | 7 
acting 1 * 1: 
cuſtom or manner mos ris m. | 1. 
Rags 
And the thing done by then 
18 
4 work ö pd Eris n. 
blen 
ae, eee 4 7005 
Acts of Men. 1 
122. Every Pan hath his . 
bu ſine ſe | nEgOtium in. 15 we 's 
charge munus Eris n. Ii 
duty or office officlum in. 
123. Man's duty lies in 
labour libzr öris m. dne 
virtue virtus tis f. {cert 
faithfulneſs fidzs Ei f. aud 
124. He ſhould do all with 1 73 
counſel consilium i n. . 
care cũra æ f. cue 
|] ſtudy ſtudium i n. 2 a 
vv ithout delay möra æ f. * 


work, there is pzopoſed * 4 

to them 1 
a law lex gis f. n 133. 
an example exemplum i in. 4 way 
a4 feward premium i n. * path 
" s « pnſhment pœna æ f. bid 


126. U 


har . 
— a 


»wims Subfantive, 


; Y 126. The * mand to 
allow to every thing its 
bt or due Jus ris n. 
Hort h or price pretium i in. 
8. hönör oris m. 
res 127. Rewards are 
| hus dis f. 
gloria æ f. 
lücrum in. 
* mercẽ dis f. 
| ſtips is f. 
128. Punichments are 
@ſfiripe verber is n. 
rath or killing nèx cis f. 
ther] 

Z 129. In work ill done 

1 | there is 

blemiſß mendum in. 
ot of blot mäcüla æf. 

¶aultineſs or v.ce vitium 1 u. 
his 130. A vitious act is 
: @ fault culpa æ f. 

x cine er imè n Inis n. 
„ un, {cls Eris n. 
in F 131. A trime is 
m. Nudne ſe luxus ns m. 
Peceit or a cheat dölas i m. 

* aud ſraus dis f. 
vith Y 132. Perſons guilty of 
10. ETLMEes are 

thief fũr is m. 

eu- throat licro önis m. 

u. g adulteren adulter -i m. 
) ef £ 3 
bed The works of Men. 

| 33. For paſſage they make 
| in. 1 way via æ f. 
in. wy catlis is m. 

e, pon: tis m. 
6. 18 ” | 


| candle 


| & garden 


Oy 


19 
4 boat cymbazf. 
a ſhip navis is f. 
134. For lighting they 
make 
| 2 torch fax cis f. 
| a lamp lampas dis f. 
candela z f. 


135. Of Land they make 
a court or plat areaz f. 
a field ager'ri m. 
hortzs | Ms 


136. Of Metals they make 


money nummus i m. 
or pecanla æ f. 
a drinking-cup põcülum i n. 
a kettle. lebe tis m. 
137. Of Flax or 77001 is 
made 
a thred filumin. 
a line linea æ f. 
a rope funis is m. 
a (ack ſaccus im, 
a (ail or vei! velum i n. 
cloth pannzxs i m. 


138. Of Mod they make 


4 ſtaff ſcipio õnis m. 
a board täbüla æ f. 
a plank planca æ f. 


139. For eating 


t hs cook coquus 1 m. 
makes bread Panzs is m. 
butter bütyrum in. 
cheeje CaSEus i m. 


a banquet or fealt Epitilum i u. 


140. For dzinł ing they 


make 
broth or \ pott age jas ris n. 
ale or beer cerevĩſia a f. 
wine viuum in. 
B 2 141. Eat- 


” — ,, r m1 


95 Notns Subſtantive. 


$a * — 42 


a gown 


141 Eating a ameal is 


4 breakfaſt jentaciium i n. 
* dinner prandium 1 u. 


4 common ſupper cœnaæf. 


142. For cloathing they 
make 


an bat gxlerus i m. 
a peruke _ calièndrum i n. 
a gat ment veſtis is f. 


143. A garment 15 
a cloſe coat ttinica æ f. 
a cloak pälllum ien. 
roga æ f. 


144. An Landr-crafrs-man 


a-[mith 
vio; "awright fiber rim.” 


a maſon 
makes a chariot currus ũs m. 
arms arma orum pl. n. 
a veſſel vas (15 0, 
a bu:lding © de if. 
bouſhold ftuff süpellex CiLis f. 
an inſtrument inſtrumencumi n. 


145. To a Chariot belong 


aà pole të mo õnis m. 
an axel. tree axis is m. 
4 wheel röta æ f. 


146. For the beaſts are 


a yoke jügum i n. 
a ſaddle. ſella æ f. 
a brille frœnum in. 


a — 


Arms. 
| 147 Arms are 


a weapon - telum i n. 

4 b w arci/s us m. 
an arrow sag itta æ f. 
4 gun ſclopas im. 
4 [word” ensis is m. 


or gliding i m. 


| 


a ſtreet or row 


a gate or-port 
a wall 


EX Ap; 13 
K — N a - 
LS 


Buildings. : 
148. Buildings are 


a cote or cottage. Ciſa æ f. 


an houſe dms ũs i f. 
a palace  pPillarium in. 
a fort or caſtle arx cis f. 
a tower turris is f. 


149. A building raiſed for 
Wozſpip is 


an altar altare is n. 

a temple) ; 
mi 

e bf templum in 


150. In a building is 


the wall pär les Eris m. 
the cellar cella æ f. 

the khitchin cülina æ f. 
the hall aula x f. 


cimera Z f. 
151. To an {ouſe belong 


the chamber 


a gate janiia æ f. 
a dor oſtluin i n. 
a window teneſtra æ f. 


152. To a Gate belong 


a poſt poltis is m. 

4 4 hinge cardo inis d. 

BY. LL. Dut- :houſeg are 

a fable ſtäbũülum in. 

4 privy ſoricazf. 

a barn horreum i n. 

a mill mola z f. A 
154. A company of houſes % 

are | 


vicys i m. 
- Oppidum i n. 
or urbs is f. 


155. To a Town belong 
porta æ f. 
murus i m. 


a lw. 
or city. 


a publick-meet- * 
ing place if: forum i n. 


156. 0 


JI 


W118 
D * T # 

4 * 
— 


Chap. V. 


2 


Noung Sibffantive. 


21 


* 156. Houſh and Land our of 
To wn is 


rus ris n. 
| villa * f. 


village 


Houſhold- ſtuff. 
157. Eouſpold⸗ſtul k. 


ver un. 
diſcus 1 m. 
sede is f. 
cithedra æ f. 
menſaz æ f. 
tapes tis m. 


mappaæ f. 


lectus im. 
arca Z f. 


forceps ipis d. 
follis is m. 


Bic Inſtruments by which 
Men work are 


naler or beetle he rt 1 m. 
needle =cle us f. 
cölug i f. 

clavis is f. 


e "+ 8 * 
3 


159. Inſtruments of Muſitck 
are 
tympinum in. 
tivlz æ f. 


fiſtula æ f. 


tũba æ f. 
lyra æ f. 
ſides is f. 


i; Cs wo os . 
2-2 Wo ent 


4 pipe 


3 whiſtle * 


$8162. Inſtruments of (riking 
3 are 


fuſtis is m. 
virg : & f. 


ela 
bod or wand 


1 


161. Tools of hugbandzp 


are 


an harrow or rake raſtrum i n. 
a fork _ furca æ f. 
an hook falæ cis f. 
a ſpade ligo onis.m. 
162. Inſtruments of catching 
| are | 


rete is n. 
caſſis is m. 
hamus 1 Me © 


a bat or ftick 


a net © 
an hay net 
a hook 


Recreation. 


163. When wozk is over 
there 15 


orium in. 
| quies tis # 
fomnus im. 
Indus 1 m. 


leiſure 
quiet 
fleep 
play 


8 — 


— — 2 — —_ 


Societies of Men. 


164. Men join together into 
a family familia z f. 

4 corporation civitas tis f. 

a Kingdom regnum in. 

a (chool {chdlazt. 

a church ecc!&:la# f. 


165. In a Family are 


a husbaad vie im. 


a wif ux yr Octs f. 
the Lord or Mr, Dominus im. 


the Lady or Dame Domina æ f. 


hErius im. 

hèerz f. 

miniſter ri m. 
anciilazft. 


the maſter 
the miſireſs 
a ſervitor 
a hand-maid 


166. In a Cozpozati an are 


a citizen CIV7$ is C. | 
a magiſtrate magiſttãtus us m. 


B 3 4 Judge 


— * Era 


170, A company of People 
©" I 


4 rout tur ba æ f. 
4 tribe trid/s us f. 

{ S natio Gais f. 
e I or gens tis f. 


1771. In a School are 


the maſter mãg iſter ri m. 

be ſcholar diſcipülus i m, 
7 Rules; in 5 Church 

are 

Jeſus Sas um. 

Chrift {Rp im, 

an Apoftle Apöſtölus i i m. 

a Biſhop Epiſcopws i m. 


a Prieſt or Elder Presbyrer -i m. 


& Deacon  Diacouw i m. 
Of War. 
173. Betwixt Men there 1 oy 
peace Pax cis f. 
or ſtrife Its tis f. 
a fight pugna æ f. 
4 war | bellumin, 


| 


= 


a judge Jade leis e. 174. To Mar are needfal | 
Fee ; a leader dür cis c. 
167. In a Kingdom is is « folder: miles Klee. 
the King REx gis m. a guardian . cuſtos dis c. 
the Queen Regina Z 3 enemy hoſtis is o. iN 
the People _ Poptilus 1 m. an army exereitus us m. of. 
168. The King hath W 
4 throne thrönw i m. Of computing. * 
a ſcepter ſceptrum 1 u. Y 
a crown corona æ f. 175. The thing computed i u 9 
2 5 any whole eſtate, Ws 
169. The People are foot, pound ? 8 298 
the nobles proceres um pl. m.] half of an As 5 ſemiſſis 
the commonalty pleèbs is f. one twelfih part 7? 
the rabble vulgus i m. & n. of it, an inch > Uncia 
| or ounce 


176. A heavy body is 


a burden ond Eris n. 
a weight ponds Eris n. 


Of Figures. 


177. A round body is 
4 bowl or globe globus i m. 


a ball pila 2 f. 
an orb orbis is m. 
Of Signs. 1 
178. A ũgn ot a thing is 
an image imago inis f. 
an idol idõlum in. 3 
179. A ſign of a thought is oth 
4 ſpeech fermo õnis m. 1 wy 


180. In a Speech are 


a letter litera æ f. 

a ſyllable  1yllibazf. 

a word verbum 1 n. 
181. A Dpecch is 


a tale ot fable fſabllazf, 


p ty re. b 


prèx cis f. 


p- * bor. V. Notung Adjective. 23 
bl: | fame or n e 1E ther 
An biſtory hiſtöri⸗ * f. | z ben 3: 4; W * 8 I 
* or je | JOcus i m. 14 ſepia # 1 
5 ſong mũſa æ f. paper Papyrus i f. 


182. A ſpeech wiit down is 
letter or epifile epi ſt&la æ f. 

a liber ri m. 
bibliz crum pl. n. 


185. %. 


What a thing is it Qualis is e. 


A. The thing is 
talis is e. 
bonws a um, 
1 mals a um. 
gomely, handſome pulcher ra rum, 
Vonder ful mirus a um. 
ure - Pur a um. 
—— Ft or fitting apts a um. 
| pra grãtus a um. 
vain vans a um. 
5. . Froubleſome moleſtys a um. 
_- 186. As to its value a 
E- things 15 
t 15 Perth dignus a um, 


ear, bigh-prized carus a um. 
3 heap, low-prized vilis is e. 
187. &s to neatneſs a thing 


Wo 


mundys a um. 
filthy | turpis is e. 
WM Pure 


PUrys a um. 


” Þncere lincErus a um. 


or charta æ f. 
184. Of Nouns Subſtantive 
you have heard 
enovgh 


| or f00 much 
§. 2. A VOCABULARY: 
Or, Exemples of Nouns Adjective. 


1 . B. Here follow the moſt uſed Adjeliues, which cannot ſtand alone 
* 2 Sentence, and therefore ſome of the e are here * gown 


1 
nimi⸗ T 7 


188 As to its Fare it 1s 


well, ſafe falvys a um. 
proſperous proſper a um. 
happy ſẽliæ c. 3. 
wre te hed, miſerablemiser · a um 
whole totus a um. 
or torn läcer- a um. 


189. A tin tompared to 
another 1s 


diverſe, varijus virius a um. 

like | Similzs isse. 

or unlike diſsimtlis is e. 
Tr -y 

equal or even par dc. 3. 

une qual or odd impar 5 


190. As to its motions a 
thing is 

lenis is e. 

vehEmens c. 3. 

ctbèr · is e. 

tardus a um. 


gentle 
ſtrong, earneſt 


ſwift, quick 
flow, tardy 


191. As to its weight it is 
beavy, grievous 


ravis is e. 


Vis 15 e. 


192. As 


light 
B 4 


* * - y _ a * 
34 1 — rr > 8 * 
2 4 E r n e A D 


2 * 5 J * 
* — * « £ — 


—— — 


— — 


— 4: be hoes? - © Aa 3 


* 


EST. 


24 Nouns Idjective. 


7 
1 15 


Chap. vi er. 


192. ASt to the time of its 
continuance a thing is 


LEP: nov a um. 
old pets C 3, 
eternal ternus a um. 


19 3. L to its ſeaſonablene\ 8 


it 15 
late, lag Serus 4 um. 
ripe matnr#s a um. 
or unripe immätürs a um. 


194. As to its ts figure a thing 


15 
ſtreig ht, right rectus a um. 
crooked curvus a um. 


195. To the Sight a thing 
1s 


white albus a um. 
black niger a um. 
red rũbèer a rum 


grey-haired, hoary cinus a um. 


196. To the Taft a thing is 
ſweet ©... dulcis1s e 
bitter amarus a um. 


197. To the foie a thing 


{week ſcerted "po is e. 

ſtinking tEter ra rum. 
198. To the Toucb a body 
| 15 

plain planus 

even æquus 

ſmooth lævis 


or eb, ſharp aſpèr · a um. 


199. A thing dedicated to 
Pod 35. . 
ſacred, boly sic Ia rum, 
others are prof ane prõ ã as 


200. The gu ofa thing i is 


true ' verus Ss 
or falſe falſus 5 : 
certain certus dead 
Or doubtful a dübjus I und, 
201. A Spirit is ; "90k 
good, gracious plus L ledn 
or graceleſs 1mpius Futiſh 
202, A Wop is : 10 
ſtrong or firm firmus == 
tender tènèr · a um. 3 
hallow cävus. 3 
| £7 tent, 
O2. Mature IS ; howin, 
frutful über c. 3, '& i2n1 
or barren {terilis. 1 71 
204. The Months are 112 
| Fanuary Januarjus Mi 
February  Februarius 
March Märtlus 
April April:s 
May Majus 
June ünius 
July ulius 
Auguſt Avguſtus 
September September 
Of obey October 
November November 
December December. 
205. A place is 
| ful . plenus 
or empty _ Inauis 
206. As to its placing a 
thing 1s 


r'eht, on the right dexter -a um, 


or left finif er- a um. 
207. The | 
Air is clear, not cloudy «&nus 


Light, clear or bright clarus 4 


Shade, dart or dull obſcũru 
Garth, &y ſiccrs ö 
A Stone, Har Jürus 

Pt: ik, et mollis 


208, E 


5 
1 1 


v] 


BZ V. Mons Adjective. 2 
| | — — — 
s 208. An animal 18 or anpolifht, rude riidis 

5 late ful vigil c. | fool:fh {talrus 

live vivus 
dead mörcüus 215. n FOMNs diſpoſition | 
f 274 well sanus | | Airis 

7 <> , faint æger ra rum mild, mee mitis N 

| pinguis or cruel, fierce © ſavus 

1 oY macey ra rum, or barbarous barhärus Ek 

© utiſh. brũtus chaſte, pure caſtus _ : 
wild kerus or wanten la ſcĩvus 
X evere ſeverus 
209. An Animal by its / 
1 power 18 | 2:6. As to his private man- 
N tent, able pötis | ne CS he 1s 
Kowing gnarus 1555 ſanctus 
N 1gnorant Ignarus | ſober - SOOrius 
200. For wang of Ro | or drunken Erjus 
2. powers e ſtout, valiant fortis 
ind cæcus 
155 e pol 217. In his tarriage to others 
dumb mũtus 1 
Tame or halt claudus juſt 5 juſtus 
4 6 or unjuſt injüſtus 
11. As to action an animal | Fed *Imicus 
= 18 or fr. endly Inimicus - | 
ik, chearful Aalacer ris re. Man 15 
ris te ſow, backward pigzr ra rum. 5 11 
Mart acer ris re. * c $5 CIA 
| 0¹ ſluggiſh, lazy ſegnis . OT pow paupèr C. 3. 
23 219. As to his fare he is 
212. After much action it is | free, a ſreeman lber -a um. 
We2ry teſſus or bond, enſlaved ſervus 
5 I ed laſſus . | ? 
2 220. As to his age he is 
A body without a cover: DS is | young jüvénis 
n. 1 led, bare nadus old, an old perſon SENER c. 
2 221. As to ety a Man 1 
= 213. A Stomath is , 1255 locke wit N 
cenus Mngry, faſling jcjunus _ fo dels 
arus fad, ſatisfied <artir-a um. 
ſcarf „222. A Man's countenance iS 
4 4 Man as to his under- cheary, merry Hhiaris 
1 ſtanding is or /orrowful meœſtus 
e dap ens blit he, hind blandus 


26 Nouns Adjective. Chap. viſÞ-"*p 
joyous lætus fix ſex A 
or ſad triſtis ſeven ſeptem 
| eight octo 
223. Goods are nine nöd sm Þ 
ones own, proper Pproprius Fen decem | und. 
or common communis twenty vigint! 
private privãtus thirty trĩginta 
or public ł püblicus an hundred centum 
8 a thouſand mille 7 
OE 1 both ambo æ o. 
224. Qu. * 
Hm big is it quantus 3 175 their number 
A. ſo big, ſo much tantus dnia dete Q. 
great magnus many multzs a um. 231 
little parvus or few paucis a um. eus, 
big | grandis all omns is e. To 
or ſmall, lender exllis frequent frequens c. 3. lus, 
| \ 5 or ſeldom, rare rar a um. Q. 
225. As to its meaſure a 232 
12 thing is s — re 
Jong longus 
or ſhort i breris . 
broad lãtus of what number er J. us 
or narrow anguſtus in what order is it 3 = 
ample, large amplus A. it is firſt prims 337 
vaſt Bat” 1.26 ſecond SEcundus pha? 0 
bizh altus 0 58 A tertius 15 3 
ä Goofs. | four uarrids 190 
or tow hümilis fifth kw | lime! 
— | | | E ee >a un 54. 
ſeventh eptimus 
226, Qu. | eighth * 
bow many quðt ninth non nes ſe 
| tenth dEcimus bis 
A. Things are the middlemoſt medias 3} e ſai 
fo many ES 3 und. nothe 
one ũnus a um. 229. Hereafter you ſhall lea,“ “ 
Two dit» # 0, more plas ris Ta 
ee trer es la- even the reſt cardr-a um, 647. 
fur quatiior p | | 0 
Hue quinque nh 4% 
. two 


C HA! 


p. Vi daß. VI. 8 i" P1onouns.. - | | | 97 


CH AP. VI. 
Concerning a Pronoun. 


"OW that you have learned the Nouns; \ both Subſtantive and Adje- 
ctive, next tell me what is 4 Pronoun ? 

230. A: A Pronoun is a word that may be uſed inſtead of any Noun 
Fubftantive ; as, 
Inſtead of my Name, I ſay I, Ego. 
Inſtead of thy Name, 1 ufe Thon, Tu. 


er Inſtead of his Name, I ſay He, Ille. 

Q. Hm many ſuch words be there that be Pronouns? | 
n. 231. A. There be fifteen Pronouns : ego, tu, ſui, ille, ipſe, in, bie, is, 
n. neus, tuus, ſuus, noſter, veſter, noſtras, and veſtras. 
Io which may be added theſe, quid, quis, cũjũs, cujas, a 4 idem, 
3. Illus, nullus, qui, quidam, uter, neuter, alter. 


Q Are theſe Pronouns Subſtantive or Ad jedt ve? 


232. A, Quid, ego, tu, and ſui, are Pronouns SubBantive, all the reſt 
Fr re r Ache. 5 | 


5. wy 3 


The Pronouns, 


2 


33. Q. What is it quid n. A either or one? 

1 1705 which bie guss | of che rwo ** aner 
e neither of the two neuter 
Abou tu 235-Q Whoſe is it cũjũs 
gimſelf ſui A, It is mine mis 
What © | | fs thne rfitts 


or is his own SUtts 
or iſtẽ | our s noltzr ra rum. 
nes ſelf ips6 yours veſtzr ra rum, 
hs - hic | their own Das 
1 | e ſame idem 236. Q. Of wh. it en =, 
not her alius tribe is he? dig 
| leahhne one quidam A. of our tribe * ndfirae * 
pry one ullus of your tribe viſtas 


V one or none nullus 
n. bat, wbich, who qui 


34. Q. which or 
whether of the > Uter 


[WO 


___ Uerbs Meuter. 


2» 


CHAP. vl. 
Of 2 Verb. 


* 


is a Verb. 


Hus you have ſeen *. Nouns and the Pronouns, now tell me what 


237. 4. A Verb is a part of Speech that berokeneth to Be, to Du, 


to Suffer. 
Q. Which words then are Verbs? 


238. 4. All thoſe words are Verbs, which beroken either to Tx or tt 


Do. or to Suffer, i. e. to be done, or acted upon. 
Q. How many forts of Verbs. are there? 


239. A. There are threæe- fir of F 


I. Some betoken tae, ab;. eſſe tobe 


and ſuch are called Tur Neuter, 
II. Some betok 


and theſe are calk@dVerbs 4#ive, 


III. Some beroken ty be done, or, to tha 
Be Haft; and. 
erte) have thejr firſt ending either, 
< 3+ In ᷑re or 1 


Agi to be done, audit 
240. N. B. AA Verbs 


1. In are or ar1? lat 


2. In cre or er1 


0 as COS ma 2 


$5 


Ted upon, as, amari fo be Love 
fe are called Verbs Paſſive. 


In ice or iti 


A Vocabulary of Perks, eſpecially Primitive. 
F. 1. Exemples of Verbs Neuter. 


241. A Uerb Neuter bete | 
kens 


fo be eſſe 


242. That, which ig, uſes 


to become 1 
$9 grow creſcere 
poconfinue or ahide minere 


243. Where nothing is, the 


thing uſes 
to be empty Vacare 
fo want or be 8 
without Carere 


to want ox need Ezere 


, 4 
. 


to be harmful, to? 


to lie along. 


244. Things good oz bad uf 


to be pleaſing, to? F 
pleaſe 7 e 


nocere 
harm 0 


to be painful, to" $eblere 


| pa.n 


245. As to their ſtate things 
ule 
to be able poſſe 
to be well or ſtrong va re 
to pine or languiſh languere 


246. As to its poſture it uſe: 
zacere 


to hang pendere 


t» ſtick or cleave to harere 


247 


i to become, cilere to be h 


_ Chap! ViſWbop 


247 
| lie fa 


gere to at, audire to hen $25 1+ 


act, 


5 'yY. 52. 


begin 
beg in 


carry 


y nil 


naß. 


creal 
fram 
form 


move 
WY 8 e 
put 
mana 
bend 
Arete 
chang 
let, t 
leave 
bear 
endur 
have 
cover 


Chap. VII. Verbs Active. 29 
247. To the ſenſes things to be warm tEpeare © — 
1 | to be bop calere 
lie falr, ta N partre 249. To the Ear they ap- 
be open or plain pirere pear 
& lie hid, to lurk lätẽre mats; 2 
wha® be clear Os tbo cones + {re | 
250. That they act ſo or ſo 
Jo, o 248. To the Couch they uſes 
| appear | fo be allowed lice 
or be cold frĩgẽre to like them libere 
i | 
3 2. Exem les of Verbs Active. 
be 655 1 — * p f W 
heal 25l. A Uerb Active 11 ſignifies 255. To move a thing i 18 
44, or to do ipere eee Nit clẽre 
love ate I, — W 
2 to act ccœpiſſe = 14988826 3 : 3 
begin a work ordiri 5 2 it kozwardis 
= carry on gerere FHN © ducere 
finzſh or end finite rrudere 
>». nate or do facere to arive pelitre 
4 | to roul voölvère 
| a to ſend or fing mittère 
1. 2 18 ö 
| 253 TY ng | to caſt or throw Jicere 
dun Creare to draw trahere 
uu ame or faſhion nngere to carry vehere 
form formare 
| 257, The thing moving is 
254. To att is {aid 
move movere to 20 ire 
urge urgere to come vEnire 
put poöaère to follow e qui 
ü manage or rule règère to give way, 1 
110 25h bend - ftletere or go off * cedere 85 
ſtretch rendere to fly füge 
change mũtãre to ſtray or rove errare 
let, to let alone sinète to leap or jump alire 
\ 
bree firſake hs 258. What is nt faſt uſes 
| endure or ſuffer pati to tremble: reromere 
t uſe: have habere to fall cidere 
cover tẽgẽre to ruſh or tumble rute 


259. To 


— — 


Uerbs Active. 


259. To 0M a thing is 


to increaſe it au; ere 
to fill plere 

to adorn ornare 
to paint pingere 


260. To have a thing is 
to tale or contain it cipere 
to Hold it faſt tenere 
to keep or ſave ſetvãte 


261. Good things uſe 


to nouriſh A re 
to cheriſh fovere 
to bleſs, or make 
happy , i > beare 
0 belp juvare 
2062. Ebil things uſe. 
to hurt or harm |ladere 
to affright terrère 
Fo 2 wa ®Þturbare 
263. Lightſome bodies uſe 
to ariſe _ oriri 
to ſhine lucere 


t) elitterortwinkle micare 


3 


— 


Acts of Lifeleſs things. 


264, Fire uſeth 
to burn or be 
kindled 5 ade 


to burn or ſcorch Uurere 
to teaſt or roaſt torrere 


263. Water uſes 


to flow flizre 
t9 boil up ' fervere 
plucre 


** ö 
4 


to rain 


4 


| to ſound 


The As of Animals 
266. Animals are wont 


to be born naſci 
to live yivere 
to ſenſe or feel {entire 


to remove or flit _ migrare 


267. Their like im powers 


them 

to be able quire 

to dare or venture audere 
to try ex pEriri 
to ſtudy or labour itidere 
to ſeek after perere 
to beware of cavere 
fo get Or obrain pot ici 


to ue or Mate 


uſe of FP üci 


to enjoy frũi 
268. That they may live 
f they uſe | 
to eat . Edere 
do drink bibẽre 
to ſwallow . vorare 
to play or ſport lũdece 
to ſleep dormire 
269. To ſenſe or perceive by 
ſenſe is 
to ſee a thing videre 
to bear it audire 
to mel it odorart 
t taſt ir guſtãre 
to touch it tangere 


ſenſed they ought. 


Sönare 
to taſte of or ſavoury sapere 


| to ſmell or caſt? . 


a ſmell P lere 


271. To ſound is 
7 ſtrepere 


ſtridere 


Chap. VII 


270. That things may bs 


III 


be 


e by 


7 bs 


Uerbs Ictive. 


EI 


275. When ill they uſe 


277. Live things they uſe 


bunt 


ftrangle 
al - - 


hap. VII. 
1 * ? crepire 
roar fremere 
thunder tönãre 
$72. When they remove they 
uſe 
ſtep or % gradi 
walk ambii:are 
> £0 4 foot pace vadere 
run currere 
17. \ nare 
152 volare 
273. When they do not go 
7 they uſe 
| "uu | ſtare 
Fi. «dere 
© lie down ciibare 


or cumbere _ 


274 l w hen oppꝛelled 
ule to eaſe themſelves, 


that is 
break wind pedere 
pit or ſpue ſpũüère 
vomit vomere 
make water mejere 
dung cacare 


weep flere 
mourn lũgere 
complain quèri 
die mori 
76. Their young ones they 
uſe 
et or beget generire 
| 1 or gignère 
ear or bring N 
forth * ppirere 
nurſe . nütrire 


Venar! 


ſtrangülare 


necare 


Acts of their men rn 


278. With their Limbs * 


uſe 
to climb fcandere 
to fight pugnare 
to ſtrike againſt of-tend*re 
to crop car pèxe 
to pluck _ - vellere 


279. With their head they 


uſe 
| fo nod nere 
280. With their eyeg they 
uſe 
to ſpie ſpEcere 


to ken or diſcern cernere 
to behold or look to tũẽr i 


281. With 2 mouth they 


70 brealbe ſpirare 


282, With their voice they 


uſe 
| fo cry out clamare 
fo groan gemere 
fo ſing canere 
to mut er murire 
to how! aware 


283. Particularly 
an horſe uſes to? 
neigh | Phinnite 
an aſs to bray radere 
a bullock to low mũgire 
a lion to roar rugire 
an hog fo grunt grunnire 


.a dog to bark {irrare 


a ſheep ta bleat balare 


284, With 


2 1 2 — e ds 0 K — EO a DEE gs 8 A — y > 
— 3 0 "_— 5 — . A _ _ y 2 9 \ — F.. 78 y 
* PPP c 4 2 F MERIT. x e i 
2 wa of * , 3 . . — 2 X 23. FIG —— AH 4 ” = TS = - 
— A N _ * 22 - 4 wa. A #* Sad ts. o CHOI 6 . 3 Fw 
3 . 6 * A Pg” 8 5 2 12 
. Po «* wy — 1. { 5 £ : — 4 - * 


32 erbs Terive. Chap. vu b 
284. With their tongue they] 290. What they pzize they . 55 
ule | ule * L 
to lick F. lingère 15 Þ to love Amãre | £ 
to lap lambere to wiſh for optãre 1 as 
bo ſuck Sugere | to hope ſperare Fo tel 
| ; to de ſire or covet ctipere 0 con 
285. With the teeth they to [een quare;e po ſa) 
| ule to favour fivere - 0 2 
to champ or chew'mandere fo joy or rejoice in gaudere 
to gnaw rodere to wonder or admire mirart 29 
to bite mordere 


286. With their rails or 
claws they are able 


to claw ſcibere / 
to [cratch ſcalpère 
\ 
to rub or wear > rerere 
away 1 


| 291. What ny dillike they | 
uſe : 


to hate ödiſſe 
to contemn Or _, 
oeſpiſe 7 remnere 
| fo ſcorn _ ſpernere 


#0 fear or dread timere 


The Acts of Men. 
287, A Man is able 


to know or un- 

der ſtand > {cire | 
to remember meèminiſſe 
Fo will velle 


288, That he may underſtand 
he ought 
to conſider consjderare 
to eee . maàditari 
to know or tate © _._. 
#nwledze of popire 
toweigh peudere 


289. It is the act of his 
Judgment 
fo judge judicãre 
to approve or like probare 
to efteem or prize æſlimãre 


fo cendemn damnare 
to think piirare 
to believe credere 
to truſt tidere 


duely to regard colere 
to conſult consiilEre 
to care cũrãre 
to make ready, pArare 


to ſer ve or deſerve mEEri 


| to fail or deceive fallere 
to ſin 


6 


or met ũète 


ſr IT 


The Duty of Man. 
292. It is the duty of a Pan 


prepare 


203. When a Man doeg not 
his duty he is ſaid 


peccare 


294. To do well uſes 


Fo become one decere _ hae 
— n 
The Acts of our Member 
295. With our mouths we 9. 
to laugh Tidere num 
to talk [qui gath 
do prate garrire | mia 


VI Pbap. VII. Verbs Active. 33 
— — — — — rn — — 
ey bold our peuts 'tacere | fo joyn Jjungere 
to ſcatter ſpargère 
_ By our, ſpeech weuſe |; Kite dividere 
4K rogare to diſtribute or? 
| tell x | narrare F give out : - rributre 
0 confeſs farcri 
0 77 0 dicære 300. That which is 
70 90 1 7 8 | ſhur © — Hing open pand re 
297. The n uſes of | hid ew monſtrare 
peech are . : TY, 
hey , fear F 301. That which withſtandg 
&, vow - vdvers them they are able 
0 admoniſh = monere: to firike Icere 
Fo adviſe 11: ſTuadere to beat or over 
L call for or re. olcere | come Finckre 
S quire N to tame or ſubdiie domare 
Jo bid or command jfibère to ſpare parcere 
Fo bid or invite; invitãre 
J frbid 14/4, verare | . . Water men are wont 
—> cl vocare | to draw haurire 
| pray precari | 70 pour or pour out fundere 
1. , be eech Grace and in it to waſh lavare 
: | ORE 
Ban | pn or ene ">ſpondere 303. Animals men uſe 
J praiſe ” laudire e palcere 
Fo milk mulgcre 
208. With our hands wo to clip or ſhear rondere 
uſe 304. Men employed ule 
Jo give 3 dire to ſell vendère 
bo take _—skmere to buy emere 
not Þ ſnatch _  . ripere to we debꝭre 
Þ lift ot tate up tolicre to build ſtrucre 
Jo carry portare | | fo dreſs or cook coquere 
% lay hold of, FE 
io catch bo 1 305. When Men eat a meal 
s | they are {aid 
win ron > 40 breat faſt jentare 
. : I fo ane prandcre 
Their acts about ſeveral |” 15 n 


nden things. 


| 2 If there be di ber ſe things 
= they are able 

number them niimcrare 

gather or chuſe legere 

mix or mingle miſcere 


1 


Mens acts by Inſtruments. 


306. With an inſtrument 
men are able 


to thump or Ane rundere 
C 


 Uerbs Paſſive. 


1 


ro break ftangere | to govern - gilibernare 1. 
to burſſ rumpère . | toeftabliſh a law ſaneĩre ere 1 
to preſs or ſqueeze prmère to puniſh punire 5 
2 defend | defendere 311. It's the duty of the 
307. With a ſharp inſtrument ruled 
they uſe to obey obẽdire 
lis cut mere to fear, ſtand inawe vEreri 
cindère | 
to ſmiteor to hack cxdere ſome to each docere | 
to prieæ pungère to learn difekre N. B 
to write cribere- to imitate b Imicari Now 
„ hers t FI > I 
308. With a cleanſing In. | rene P maderi 11 
ſtrument they uſe to ſew süxre 11 
to ſweep or bruſh verrere to knit niere 4 
to purge or cleanſe purgare to grind - molere 1 
to rub out _ celere | ſome to dig  ſodere Wd 
to poliſh polire I plow arare Hz | 
359. Witha Band they | ½,ʒẽʒꝙe Fe 245 
8 are able 313. It's the work of the 2 10 
to bind  vincire 7 Deller 315. 
to gird cingere | fo comb pectere Jo are be 
to hoop V.cre to trim up comere Js, 
a to cloath or array imicire . 
| And then ** 10 uſe to put on indutre rid 
#0 looſe or looſen ſolvère to put off | exiiere 1 
.. . . actx ofc if 
The acts of ſome particular zs faid | 
{tates of Men. to uſe or be ac-" ſure 2. 
nin or . cuſtomed | 318. 
3 1 5 t s the act o LJ Ruler to uſe or to wont $Olere Fſide th. 
to reign regnare to exerciſe exercere : Q.# 
| 5 ſigniſie 
F. 3. Of Verbs Paſlive. — 
| | 2. In 
Q. Thus you have ſeen Verbs Neuter and Verbs Active, now proceed to U 3. 1: 
me how are Verbs Paſſive made? 4. In 
315. 4. A Verb Paſſive is formed from the Active by changing Q. N 
22 I amare to love, amari to be loved. | Kh I 
2. are into ari, af J creare to create, creari to be created. riri #0 
C murare to ebange, mutari to be changed. umpi | 
| o_ errexi 


2. (| 


'IWhap.vik Aerbs Common, Deponent. 
| ay; Jer to teach, doceri to be taught. 


habere to have, haberi to be had. 
tenere fo hold, teneri f be held. 
4 | © lgere to read, legi to be read. 
. Ere into i, as &cmere to buy, emi to be bought. 
=== ..: Cagere te doe, agi to be done. | 
N. B. But ferte to bear, hath ferri to be born, and facere to do, hath fieti 
J be done. 


, ere into eri, as 


audire to hear, audiri to be heard. 
. Ire into iri, 4s {punire to puniſh, puniri to be.puniſhed. 
P ſmire fo finzſh, finiri to be finiſhed. 
N. B Thus of Aﬀives in re are made Paſſives in i. 
Now tell me the Paſſives of theſe Verbs Atives following, 


T laudare flere  debere movere irare 
; ſumère haurire nũtrire ripere frangere _. 
1 ſuadète purgare entire cëdere mordẽre, &c; 


F. 4. Of Verbs Common, 


Z Q. Ts there no more to be known about Verbs. 
316. 4. Yes, there are yet three things to be kaown about Verbs. 
© = Q. What is the firſt thing? 5 oat ran EY 
317. 4. I. Some Verbs in i ſignifie both to ad and to be afed upon, and 
Jo are both A#ive and Paſſive, and are therefore called Uęrbs Common; 


to comfort, and I Ffoexhort, and | , f to meaſure, and 
: arid 7! be comforted hortari I to be exhor ted | — I to be meaſured. 


fc | F. 3. Of Verbs Deponent. 


Q. Which is the ſecond thing, yet to be known ? | | 

318. 4. II. Moſt of the C-mon now ſignify only A&:vely, having /aid 
#/de the Paſſive Signification, and are therefore called Verbs Deponent . 
Q. What then is a Verb Deponent ? 
319. 4. A Verb Deponent is that which ends in i, as a Common, but 
ſignifies only Adively to Doe? ſo, | . 
1. Ia ãri, as fari to (peah, meditari to muſe, venati to hunt, &c. 

2. In@ri, as vereri to fear, tutti to look to, mederi to beal, &. 

3. In i, as pati to ſuffer, gradi to ſtep, mori to die, &c. | 
| 4. In iri, as mentiri to lie, ordiri to begin, experiri to fry, &c: | 
QM tell me which of theſe Verbs are Paſſive, which Common, and 
rich Deponent ? | 
rt to / ſe | to uſe | to kiſs 


70 tt 


umpi to be burſt hauriri to be dfawn oſcUarte , be kiſſed 
errexi to be affrighted | venari to bunt irui to enjoy. 


25 C 2 8. 6. Of 


2 


1 ee Porter: Chap. VI 


$6. 7 ic 1 7 hing pefſed, hy to hav been, 
to have done, to have been done. 


Q. Which is the third thing to be farther Fnown? © | 
320. A. III. That all the Verbs you have hitherto heard of, Ggnitd 
PTE to be, to do, or to be done; bur they muſt be turned in 
another end ing to make them 4 perfectly ta have Tens to hav 

done, to have been done. 1 
N. B Where obſerue that in every Verh you. myſt ea know, 
1. The Infinite Imperfe#. | | 
2. The Infinite Perfett, _ Ha ah | __- [ridere 
3. The Sapine, of which you ſhall hear more in the next C n vere 
Q. hy are theſe three to be . exatly known in the firſt place? 327. 


21. A. Becauſe theſe three are the principal endings of Verbs, anl onder. 

ſrom theſe all the reſt are formed, as you ſhall ſee hereaſter. Worder 
Tell me then how I ſhall Soi theſe three endings in every Verb? 328; 

322. 4, The Imperfect you have heard already, the perfect and ti Dincre 
Supine are formed from that Imperſeck by \theſe five Rules. Abẽre 
8. I. Verbs in are made Perfect. gere 


R. 4 are in the Imperfect is changed into ___ in the Perſedt, 21 Pere 
qtum in the Supine; as, ; 
- ..creare to create creaviſle1io have ertuked; ereãtum to create n 
© formaretoform formaviſſe to bave formed — to form Wadere 
laudare to praiſe laudaviſſe to have praiſed laudatum to praiſe Wdere 
So form mutare, errare, putare, Naar and tp hal in dre... 1 


Q. Are all in are ſo farmed : 


fbr | bn : Q 
Dire to give, makes dedifle to have given, datum to give; and 13. 
ſtare fo Maus, makes ſtecitlc #0 have flood, - \Rarym to lane. a 1 wt 

$. II. Verbs in ere. ; male 

Q. Which is the ſecond Rile? 3 | mere 

324. A. R. II. Theſe Verbs in Fre are Ser mal by Aeg! Fre in n th mere 

Ampere into zviſſe in the Perte&, and tum in the Supine; as, dmire 
flere to weep fleviſſe #9 have wet + © flerum 0 weep. Plere 

nere tin neviſſe to have ſpuun netum 10 pin pnsüls 
plere fo fill pleviſſe to have filled | pletum to n pere 

delere to blot out de lex iſſe to have blotted out deletum #0 blot o O. 4 

viere to hop ũ  vieviſle to have hooped ; vietum to hoop | 331. 

ſuere to uſe ſiueviſſe to have uſed ſuetum to uſe E 

Q. Which is the third Rule? g ce 
325, 4. K. III. Other Verbs in zre change Fre in the Imperfect | in ete 
fle in the Perfect, and 7tum in the Supine; 332. 

monère to adviſe monuiſſe to have adviſed monicum #0 adult -tere 

ftudere to ſtudy ſtudüiſſe to have ftudied ſtudirum to ſtudy pere 
habere to have häbüũiſſe to have had habitum to have 333. 


212 


So form calere, monere, debere, valere, dölére, and the reſt in . ibere 


Wap. vn. Uerbe ügnikying Perfectly. 37 


N. B. But ſome have the * i of the Supine caſt away; as, 
xenere to hold, tenuiſſe, ten' tum, for tenitum. 23 
docere to teach, docuifle, doc'tum, for docitum. 
miſcere to mingle, miſcuifle, miſtum or mixtum 1 miſeftum. | 
but tortẽre, torruiſſe, toſtum. | 
Q. Are all in ere'ſo formed * 
326. 4. No, for there are four Exceptions. R 


Except. 1. in ſomethe u is left out, ſo that they have not 105 but ie; as, 
e em fiwere firiſſe fiutum 
| dere. zediſſe ſeſſum | ©] fovere föviſſe fOcum 


prandere prandiſſe pranſum mövèere mõviſſe mõtum 
iridere ſtridiſſe——— ] vovere vöviſſe vatum 
rere cäviſſe caurum | ſervere ferviſſe —— 
327. Except. 2. In ſour of theſe the firſt Letter is doubled with a Vowe l as, 
, UFendere pependifie penſum _ | rondere tötondiſſe we oe 
mordere momordiſſe morſum fpondere ſpòſpond iſſeſpon =_ 8 
5 328. Except. 3. Some take in an s before iſe, and ſo make iſ]? ; 
d tilinere manſiſſe manfum | mulgere mulxiſſe Jovi 


Wocre juſcifſe - Juflum frigéere frixiſſe * — — 
were auxifle  auttum | | lucere- _ luxill le 
Hzcre luxifle+ luctum 


att 
' Rf 325:Excepr. 4. Of theſe in / e ſome caſt off tene befbre ſiſe; as, 
e dere rĩſiſſe ri ſum audere ————— au{um 
n Wadere ſuaſiſſe ſuãſum - { urgere urſiſſe 
ſe dere arſiſſe \— arfum | hacere - hafifle haſum 
. III. Verbs in tre 
8 Which is the fourth Rule for the Perfect and Supine 2 
330. A, R IV. Verbs in zre make the Perfect and Supine by changing 

ge in che Imperfect into 4iſe.in the Perfect, and 7tum in the Supine; as, 

7 were to nouriſ̃ Alüiſſe to have nuriſbel Alltum to nouriſh, 

= malere to grind. mdlüiſſe to have ground. mölitum to grind. 
oo OR — 4 frèmitum and _ C for volere) voluifle — 
in [mere mitiſle gemirum encre ol 
| Pmére Vömüiſſe . = ignore kerne genitum 
Þ Pere cdlüiſſe cultum ſtrèpère firepiiiſie, ſtrepicum 
' Pynsüſère condiluifie conſultum | per 2, SIpWile, — 
| Wpere täpüiſſe raptum | 
lot ou L Q. Are all in ere formed by diſſe, itum? _ 
P 2 33!. 4- No, there are eleven Exceptions. Y 
RR Except. 1. Some caſt away a Letter before ue; as, Ou 
reſt in nere ſiviſle situm põnère pdkitifle postum 
. 332. Except. 2. Some take a long i before uiſſe, and have itum long; at, 
aduieftere - periviſle petitum quzrere  "quasiviſle prog 
ſiuch pere cupiviſſe ciipicum tèrre ttriviſſe c'ritum 


have 15555 Except. 3. The reſt in e caſt off the u and make ifſe ; as, 
ere. bere blibiſſe bibllum | ſcäbzre | ſcibifle  @——— 
. B. 1 a C 3 | ee 


veh Ele 


8 werbs fignifying Petfectly. Chap. VII hap. 
ickre iciſſe ictum cœpere cœpiſſe cœptum Tnere 
edere Ediſſe ẽ ſum or eſtum | mere Emiſle emptum [{quere 
pandere pandiſſe panſum & verrère verriſſe verſum mere 
| | i paſſum vertere _ vertifle verſum | 
mandere mandiſſe manſum tribũère tribüiſſe tribũtum ; oo 
ſcandere ſcandifle ſcanſum indükre induiſſe  indicum. _—_ 
ro pfendere fendifſe fenſum 2 .  exurum folder 
wa FA prend iſſe prenſum. nuere nüiſſe nũtum —. 
ftodere od iſſe ſium ſpüère ſpjiiſſe ſpũtum ds 
rudere rũdiſſe ruzre ruifle rujirum ; — 
legere leẽgiſſe lectum meriiere metuiſſe —— KEE" 
fügere 4 eln ſuère süiſle sũtum 10» 
vells; s yemne ſolvere folviſle ſolũtum ere 
we { vali P vulſum I volvere volviſſe volatum 3417. 
334. Except. 4. Some of theſe in iſſe loſe a Letter; as, aſcEre 
vincere Vieiſſe victum tundece fadiſſe fuſum reſcer 
ſcindere ſcidifle ſeiſſum linquere Iiquiſſe lictum ölckre 
findere fid iſſe fiſſum rumpere rũpi iſſle ru ptum N erner 
335. Except. 5. And ſome in iſſe change a Letter; as, 1 _— 
_ _ —_ frangere fregifle fractum 
jacere  _jeciſle jactum ca e cẽpiſſe 
igère Egiſſe actum * ; TS: - Q. H 
3236. Except. 6. Some double i in the Perfect; as, 342. 
diſckre didſiciſſe tendere © rerendifſe renfum 2 4 
poletre poposciſſe 2 rundere tütüdiſſe tunſum | ** 
parckre — ogg >parſum | Rangere ne K tactum 128 
cidere- ckcldiſle caſum F, punxiſh fle & pundlum] So fe 
cxdere © cecidifle ceſm alete "Teellifle falfom ore 
pedere pipedifſe pedirum | pellere pepellifle pulſum L. 
cre-deire cre-didifle erẽditum | ciintre cEcinifſe cantum | 243: 
venidere vendidifle vendirum | pirtre peperifſle partum _ EXC 
pendère pependiſie penſum currère cũcurriſſe cur ſum * 
337. Except. 7. Some take inan s before iſſe, and fo make ſiſſe _ 
dicere dixiſſe dictum 1 , pinxiſſe 7 * 
dũcere duxiſſe ductum jungere junxiſſe junctum | Exc. 
regẽre rexiſſe rectum sũgère ſuxiſſe sũüctum s 
tẽg e texiſſe reftum comere comſiſſe comtum EXO 
cingere cinxifſe cinctum | promere promſiſſe promtum | 3 
3 a linxiſſe linctum ; Soimere ſumſiſſe ſumtum 55 3 
:NEETE 0 3 . | Carpere fff ; 
S minxifle mictum pere carpfifle carprum lion 
new meière 5 7 ſcal ere ſoatnd | Lone 1 
fingere . fictum 1 | * 915 ſealptum — 4 
338. Except. 8. Ot which ſome change the Letter before /; * 
ſcribere ſcripſiſſe ſcriptum cadbre ceſſiſſe -_ 4 : 
HINT.  waxille xract gerere geſſille geſtum dere. 


hap. Vu. Uerbg Ugnkelng Perfectly. | OY 


m here vexiſle vectum arere uſhfie uſtum 

m [{quere coxiſſe coctum e quaſſiſſe quaſſum 

i femere preſſiſſe preſſum vivere vixiſſe victum 

N 339. Except. 9. Some others leave our the Letter before 0%; as, 

im dere vãſiſſe vãſum ſpargere ſparſiſſe f par ſum 

m dere læſiſſe læſum temnère temſiſie temtum 

i feidere 1 805 W N flectere flexiſſe flexum 

dere röſiſſe roſum F pexiſſe & 
dere lafſſe Jaſum _ I pextiſſe erer 

. adere trjũſiſſe traſum. | mittere miliſſe miſſum 

| audere clauſiſſe clauſum i 

— Þ 340. Except. 10. Some take in a Letter before ſiſſe; as, 

| ere fluxiſſe fluxum | firucre ſtruxiſſe ſtructum 

mn | 341. Except. 11. Some few are otherwiſe formed; as, | 
atcere pavifle paſtum eſſe fũiſſe La 
reſcere creviſſe cretum | tollere ſuſtüliſſe ſublãtum 
5ſcëre noviſe nowm | cernere crevifle crẽtum 

a pernere ſprevifle ſpretum | poſle pðtũiſſe 

| ere tüliſſe lacum | 

. S. IV. Verbs in ire made Perfect. 


| Q What is the fifth Rule to form the Perfe and Supine ? 
342. A, R. v. Verbsin ire are formed by changing ire in the Imperfe& 
to 7viſſe in the Perfect, and 7tum in the Supine ; as, 


| * audire to hear aadiviſſe th) have heard aud itum to hear 

| finire to end finĩviſſe to have ended finĩtum to end 
| ſcire to know ſciviſſe to have known ſcirum to know 

tum So form mũgiĩre, rũgite, nũtrire, mugre, garrice, and the reſt in ire: 
ut ire #2 go iviſſe t) have gone lItum to go 


Q. Are all Verbs in ire (> formed ? 
243. 4. No, there are fur Exceptions. 
Except. 1. Some caſt off che i and ſo make niſſe; as, 
aire Siltiifle ſaltum I Amlcire amiciifſſe aJmitum 
Except. 2. Some caſt off the u too, and make ie; as, | 

enire venifſe ventum | 
| Except, 3. Some of chcſe take in an s and make z'ſſe; as, 
Fincire vinxifle vindtum | ſancire fſanfille nftum 
Except. 4. And of theſe ſome caſt away the Letter beſore ſiſe; as, 
Taurire hauſiſſe hauſtum | (entire ſenſiſſe ſenſum 
VN. B. Thus Verbs in re ſignifying Imperfectly th it the thing is a doing and 
ut perfectly done, are turned into an ending in iſſe to betoken that it hath 
lone it perfectly, and to them we have ſtill added the Supine. 

Axe all Verbs ſo to be turned? | 

344. 4. No, for | | 

1, Some Verbs have no Supines, as you have ſeen before SW] 
2. Some have no Perfects, as audere ——auſum, gaudẽre — gaviſum, 
dere | nlum, 

: 15 8 4 3. Same 


| 
1 
1 
1 


38 werbe fignifying Perfectly. Chap. vibe. 
there 
pqueEre 
emère 


icecre Icifle ictum l cœpere cœpiſſe cœptum 
edere Ediſſe eſum or eſtum | Emere Emiſle emprum 


panſum & | verrere verriſſe verſum 
pandere pandiſſe paſſum | vertère vertiſſe verſum 339. 
mandere mandiſſe manſum tribũère tribüiſſe tribũtum adere 


| "= ſcandifle ſcanſum indiiecre induifle inducum 


_ dere 
extiere exuiſſe exũtum 


E >fendere ſendiſſe fenſum a... 9 
wan FAY prendiſſe prenſum ] niitre niiſſe nũtum dere 
födere fodiſle um ſpüère ſpuiſſe ſpũtum idere 
rũdère rudiſle riizre ruifſe ruitum auder 
Iegtre legiſſe letum | mEtfiere metuiſle ———.} 
fiigere fügiſſe fligirum ſuere süiſſe sũtum 340. 

: - ure 
ellxre Fvelliſſe & onifun | lolvere ſolviſle ſolũtum ; 
* vulſiſſe ＋ volvere volviſſe volũtum 341. 
334. Except. 4. Some of theſe in iſſe loſe a Letter; as, ook 
vincere viciſle victum fundère fũdiſſe fuſum | 1 A 3 
ſcindere ſcidifle ſeiſſum | linquère liquifle lictum öſcère 
findere fidifle fiſſum rumpere rũpiſſe ruptum Perner 


335. Except. s. And ſome ia iſſe change a Letter; as, frre 


ficere fecifle factum frangere frẽgiſſe fractum 
jacere ' . jEcifle jactum are cẽpiſſe captum 
zgere Egiſſe actum 

336. Except. 6. Some double in the Perſect; as, | Kaye 
diſcere Adidicifle rendere ” rerendiſſe renfum aud 
poſcłre poposciſſe tundère tütüdiſſe tunſum i 


© | anetre cckcigifſ. . 
parcere 3 Pparſum ingere cctigiſſe tactum 


ugtigifie & = 
cidere -cecidifſe | caſum | pungere * auf fle {AR So fe 


cædere cxeidiſſe cæſum ſallkre Efellifle falſum at de 
pedere pepedifle peEdirum pellcre pepellifle pulſum | . 4 
cre-dere cre-didifle erẽditum | cintre cæciniſſe cantum | 2 
venidere vendidiſſe venditum pärère peperifle partum * XC 
pendere pependifie penſum | currtre cücurriſſe curſum aue 


337. Except. 7. Some take in an before iſſe, and fo make ſiſſe; as, 


dicère dixiſſe d ictum pingere pinxiſſe pictum "Exc. 
ducere duxiſſe ductum jungere junxiſſe junctum ſkincire 
rëgkre rexiſſe rectum sũgere ſuxiſſe süctum Exc. 
tẽg& e tex iſſe tectum cõmEre comſiſſe comrum baurire 


cingere cinxiſſe cinctum | promere promſiſſe promtum | N. B 
lingere ; linxiſſe linctum sũümère ſumſiſſe ſumtum 
mingère o | 90 carpere carpfifle carptum 
new . pine mictum ſcalpètre lealphflc ſcalprum . 
fingere fluxiſſe ficſtum 344. 

338. Except. 8. Ot which ſome change the Letter before ſiſſe; 15 3. 8 
ſcribere ſcripſiſie ſcriptum cedere ceſſiſſe cefſum 
trahere waxille tract gerere geſſille geſtum 


vehen 


VIl hap. VII. Aierbe ſignifying Perfectly. 30 


n here vexiſſe vectum ürkre uſſiſſe uſtum 

m gquere coxiſſe coctum ee quaſſiſſe quaſſum 

1 mere preſſiſſe preſſum vivere vixiſſe victum 

ö 339. Except. 9. Some others leave our the Letter before ſiſſe; as, 
id re vãſiſſe vãſum | ſpargere ſparſiſſe fparſum 
dere leæſiſſe Izſum temnère temſiſie temtum 


13 


vidère 9 6 On fleftere flexiſſe 1 flexum 
dere rõſiſſe roſum pexiſſe & 1 

| dere lufifle lũſum r I pextiſſe A ee 
} adere trjũſiſſe traſum. | mittère miliſſe miſſum 
audere clauſiſſe clauſum 


240. Except. 10. Some take in a Letter before faſſe ; as, 
Mare fluxiſſe fluxum ] ſirusre ſtruxiſſe ſtructum 
n | 341. Except. 11. Some few are otherwiſe formed; as, | 
alckre pavifle paſtum eſſe Ne 
greſcere creviſſe cretum | tollere ſuſtüliſſe ſublãtum 


olcere noviſle noarum cernere crevifle crẽtum 


Pernere ſprẽviſſe ſprẽtum poſſe põtũiſſe51ĩñ„» 
Ferre tüliſſe lacum TS 
3 §. IV. Verbs in ire made perfect. 


Q. What is the fifth Rule to form the Pei fect and Supine? 
342. A, R. V. Verbsiin tre are formed by changing ire in the Imperfect 
to 7viſſe in the Perfect, and tum in the Supine ; as, 


| | audire to hear aadivifle t) have heard | aud icum to hear 
finire to end finieiſſe t have ended finĩtum to end 
I ſcire to hnow ſciviſſe to have known ſciĩtum to know 
tum So form mũgire, rũgite, nũtrire, mũtire, garrice, and the reſt in ire: 
ut ire #2 go iviſſc to have gons I.tum to go 


Q. Are all Verbs in ire (> formed 2 | 
243. 4. No, there are four Exceptions. 
Except. 1. Some caſt off the i and ſo make vie; as, 
Uire sälüiſſe ſaltum Amlcire amicüiſſe amiftum 
Except. 2. Some caſt off the # too, and make ie; as, 
enire vẽniſſe ventum 
Except. 3. Some of the ſe take in an s and make x'ſſe; as, 
ineire vinkxiſſe vindum | ſancire ſanſiſſe nctum 
Except. 4. And of theſe ſome caſt away the Letter beſore ſiſſe; as, 

aurire hauſiſſe hauſtum | (entire ſenſiſte ſenſum 
N. B. Thus Verbs in re ſignifying Imperfectly th the thing is doing and 
ot perfectly done, are turned into an ending in iſſe to betoken that it hath 
lone it perfectly, and to them we have [fill added tbe Supine. 

Q. Are all Verbs ſo to be turned? 

344. 4. No, ſor 

I. Some Verbs have no Supineg, as you have ſeen before 
2. Some have no Perfecti, as audere ——auſum, gaudẽre gaviſum, 
(Fre ofilum, 


C4 3, Some 


40 8 Participle. D pd: 2 5 . Yu hap..\ 


3. Some have no —_— nor Supine, as aiercy,.&c. . "I 

* Some have no Imperfe#, are file, eee -l from « 
oſum. an 

5. Verbs in j have no Perſe, but how they may | be made to vgniie 

' Perfe#ly you ſhall learn No s. 2 from « 

Q. But have Verbs in | no Supine ? 8 N 0 

345. J. Verbs Common and Deponent in 7 have a Supinl by changing, 0 


1. ari into acum, as ſolari ſolatum, venari venarum, ofculari oſculatum. from. 
2. Sri into itum, as veréri veritum, tüéri tüitum, mercti meritum. 


but fareri bath fafſfum, and mederi ' 2 
3. By 93 4 1 into jrum, as mori to die, mor ltum Þ 7 e; but 35 * N . 
naſc natum I8qui locurum { 5 Ffrüitum & 5 x 
obliviſci oblirum } queri-—queſtum”' 1 ly  fraQum 722 
grädi greſſum N paſſum an 24 
de qui ſecũtum f uti üſum 5] S0vy 41 K ; 
4. iri into ĩtum, 45 mentiri—mentitum, pötiri—potitum, fom⸗ 
but ordiri or ſum e ee 1 | | 
oriri—— ortum merire menſu m. | 
4. ” | from 
CH AP. VIII. 
Of 4 Participle. 5 | en, 
Q. Hus you have ſeen the Nouns, Pronouns and Verbs, them next fort off i 
words is a Participle , what is a Participlle? from 
346. 4. A Participle is a part of Speech derived of a verb, and beroker 
being, doing or ſuffering as a Verb does, but is otherwiſe like a Nous ue | Lind | 
Q. Which Words then are Participles ? 12 $3; Fady, ( 
347. 4. All thoſe Words are Participles which &; | Q. Th 
1. Are derived from ſome Verb. ber 
2. Betoken being, doing or ſuffering, as a Verb den. | 1333. 
3. And are in other refpetts as Nouns. | | II. Th 
Q m many ſorts of Participles are there? be dot 
348. 4. There are ſix ſorts of Parriciples, amari 
Q. How ave theſe derived from their Verbs? lectun 
340. 4. The fix ſors of Participles are formed off from their Verbs fa&ui 
according to theſe Rules. 1354 
350. R. I. From the Verb Infinite Imperſet are formed three Partict * 1 
ples- | vac 
. Wa The Participle 1 in ans, ens, or jens, by changing as 
I. are or ari into ans) : = doctu 
2. Fe or-Eri into ens 1 N 
ere or i into ens and theſe ſignifie being or doing; as, E 
4. ire or iri into jens . nexu 
Vacare to be empty vacans being empty. fle xu 
1 from amare to love _ amans loving. mori 
mitati to wonder mirans wondering. 355. 
| Q UH 


2. from 


III hop. VII. Participles. 41. 
8 Tcalère t be hot, calens being bor. 
iſe Wy from docere. ts teach, docens teaching. 
vEr&ti to fear, verens fearing, 
linie \ lezere to read, legens?s reading. 
from O &mère ts buy, emens + /. . buying, 
8 veſci to feed, veſcens feeding. 
ing, <audire to hear, aud iens hearing. 
um. = haurire to draw, haurjens © drawing. 
mentiri t) He, mentiens Hing. 
351. II. The Participle in andus, endus or #ndus, by changing, 

7% 1. art into andus | | 
& 2. eri into endus And theſe in dus fianify paſſively to be done, 
3. 1, into endus (or about to be done or acted upon; as, 

4. ir! into iendus J vein 
amari to be loved, amandus one to be loved. 
from damnari fo be damned, damnandus one to be damned. 
mirari to admire, mirandus one to be admired... 
doceri ty be taught, docendus one to be taught, © 
from < hiberi to be had, habendus one to be had. 
-— 2 Fvercri to fear, verendus one to be feared. 
legi to be read, legendus one to be read. 
from £ {tal to enjy, fruendus one to be enjoyed. 
15 H naſci to be born, nalcendus one t9 he bor n. 
eo audiri to be heard, audiendus, one to be heard, 
from < nucriri to benurſed, nutriendus one to be nurſed. 
Kel; metĩri to be meaſured, metiendus one be be meaſured. 


352. III. The ſirſt Supine in tum or ſum, of which you have heard al- 
pady, Chap, VII. S. 6. 

| Q. Thus we have the three Participles formed from the Verb Imperjed, now 
1 whence are the other three Par ticiples formed? 

353. R. II. From the firſt Supine in um come three other Participles, 
I. The latter Supine, by As um into u, and it fignines Ty 
be done; as from, 


amatum to Love, +: | amãtu - t9 beloved ets 
lectum to — oh lectu to be read, | dotum—docu 
/erbsÞ fackum to ab, factu to be done. | dictum—diftu 
1354. U. The particip e in urus by changing u un into rug and it 12 
eUicl- es about to be, or about to do; as from. T3 £7 
— Pracarum % be empty, wvacarfirus one WY to be empty. 
| amatum to love, amãtũürus one going t) love. 


doctum to teach, doctũrus one about to teach. N10 
lectum to read, lectũrus ene about to read. | 
audĩtum t bear, auditürus one about to bear. 
nexum to jon, nexürus one about to join. F 
tlexum to bend, fexürus one about to bend, 
möritum to die, mörltürus one about to die. 


355. III. The participle in tus or ſi, by changing um into us. 
Q 4.w doth this Participle jn tus and ſus ſignify ?  Adtively, or Paſſi 4 Th - 
356. 4. The 


fren 


_ mn 2 — 1 8 2 K 
2 2 - 1s Ot PE — ry " n : _ cn 6, * * th. tc a. ada" the G 2 2 8 W e _— D 1 - 1 \ 1 4 — 1 * — 2 . . — * 
2 2 . LE 44 fs '% 2 ya 7 r n 2 7 . c Ix ade 7 _—_— * 8 mow” * w - - — 2 ov — 
4 " SY I 84 3 —_— Do - PENG * 2 7 enen © » Y "+4 þ 1 e *. . 1 2 — — abi >» 2 _ — — — 5 — 
e e 1 K « — 8 & i \ 5 — * — _ —— 


ern 


— CO 
356. 4. The Participle in tus or ſus. - 
1. If ir come from a Verb Deponent ſignifies A&ively having done; as from, 
locũtum to (peak, locutus having ſpoke , lapſum to ſlip, lapſus having ſlipt; 
ratum to ſuppoſe, ratus having ſuppoſed, &c. - 
2. If it comes from a Verb Common it ſignifies both 4&ively and Pa- A 
ſively; as from, 4 
menſum to meaſure, menſus having meaſured, and having been meaſured. | 
oſctilatum to &,, oſcũlãtus having kiſſed, and having been &iſſed. 5 
3. But if it come from any other Verb, it ſignifies Paſſively, havin. 
been done; as from, "4s 4 
amãtum to love, amãtus loved, or being loved, or having been loved. 
doctum to teach, doctus taught, or being taught, or having been taugh!. 
led um to read, lectus read, or being read, Or having been read. 
auditum to hear, audirus heard, or being beard, or having been beard. 
Q.. Which of theſe ſix Participles ſignify f N and which Imper fly Fj 
357. A. This Participle in tus or ſi ſignifies Perfe#ly, as locũtus bavingg 
ſpoke already, doctus being taught Pei fely; the other Parciciples ſignify Im 
perfely, that the thing is doing, or about to do, gyc. but not perfectly done 
Q. Are the Participles Subſtantive or Adjective?s?s CF 
358. 4. The two Supines are Participles Subſtantive, all the reſt are Ad IF 
jective; amãtus one loved, amandus one to be loved. | b 
Q. Now tell me what Participles are formed from theſe Verbs? 


Chap. 1%, 


* * * {ids 


© narrare ve nãri farcire facrire videre 
reaere gemère fulcire erEre netere | 
ſorbere queri pellere cire monſtrare | 
- vendere fra rumpere conari _ pblire, & 


Q. From theſe Supines what Participles are formed ? 

-- narratum venacum farrum A1artum viſum 
rentum gemitum Ffulrum geſtum nexum 
ſorptum ueſtum pulſum citum monſtrãtum 
venditum rũ tum ruptum conatum politum. 
And ſo far of Participles. 


C:H AR. N. 


Of Adverbs, Þcroke 
Q LT Hat is an Adverb? 1 ; 

3359. 4. An Adverb is a part of Speech moſtly joined to Q. 
—_ ſhew whether or no, or how, or where, or when any thing 2s, 4% 371. 
or ſuffers. eas 1 


F. The moſt uſual Adverbs, eſpecially Primitive. 


360. Q. Whether *.niim? in? | yes indeed _ quidem d , 
or no? ne? | | almoſt ere or ferme Idvers 
js your brother come? | no, not ne, non, haud Wpid 
A. Tes, yea, © imo, nx ſcarcely WE Ka mr 


361. Q. Wh 


ö. 1 75 X. 


P1epoſſtions.. : 43 


— coders 3.4 hs 


1. Q pore übi until JI go doneEc 
rom, is he? 5 366. Q. When returng he? 
ſtipr . Here hic A. Now nunc, jam 
Pere Ibi rait, by and by möx 
Par any where uſquam ik at any time, ever unquam 
p where nuſquam never nunquam 
. 4 of prociil 367. Q Hm LS quories? _. 
Prope | 
aN . 2. Q. Whence unde? A. my te rides sEmkl 
tame he? | twice _ bis 
„„. Hence hinc thrice tor 
ehe ſente inde four times qudtèr 
+ 63. Q Whether quo? oft | 1zps 
1M | goes he? OED | always ſemper 
* , Hither huc 368. Q. Hyw quomodo? 
y Thy 64. Q. When quando? doch be act ? 3 
done Fame he * A. Se, thus dic, Ita 
I. Then tunc, tüm raſbiy remere 
e Ad phen 1 came cum in vain fruſtrã 
ſterday ri we act gether Simul RO 
He- while, ſometime 369. Q. %: uvare ? cur? 
Ice lee Naßdum Q 1700 8 Takin 
Le, lim lg is be? 
. 65. Q. How long quamdiu ? | 45 big ram 
ſtaps he? as] quam 
A long time diu more big mäg is 
Ful A tay dim than J quam 


CHAP, X. 


Concerning Funn, 


NN Hat is a Prepoſition? 
; 370, A, A Prepoſition is a Word ſer before a Subſtantive and 
betokens the reſpect one ching has co another, as that one ching is 
before another | within it ! beyond it ab we it 
or behind it, J or wit bout it, or bebitber it, or below it, &c. 
te Q. How many ſuch Prepoſitions are there? 
H 6p 37. A. There be three and ory Words that are Marella 


The Forty three Prepoſitions. 


?, 
372. Sect. I, cis behither. 
| | at, to Citra | "Sy ! ſhort of 
e dversits towards circum about, round 
ud pd at, with circa about, nigh 
ma be fore contra againſt 


H erga 


Con junctions. Chap. X\Mhap: X 


44 1 

erga towards 1 73. Sea. II. | 

extra + without, on the out- ab or ã or abs from 

intra wit hin (ſide] abſque wit hout, not with 

infra -- '- denen below cũm wit h , Fogether with 

inter 7 between, among coram before, in ones pre. 

juxra beſide, nigh to clam out of ſight .(ſencif 

889 for, becauſe of de from and concerning 

penes with one, in ones ex or e out of 

per . through, by (keeping | palam before, in ſight «| 

pone behind præ be fore, more than 

poſt after, ſince prõ for, inſtead of 

præter | be ſi des sine without, not with 

propter nigh to, and for rentis up to 

Secundum after, according to] 374. Sect. III. 

secs by, cloſe M, in in, and into 

ſupra above, over Sb under | 

trans over, "#0 the al her ſubter under | "Apt 

ultra | beyond "(fide ' süper abe ence 

| | phy! 

CA AP. XI. _ 
EET 75 5 Ae. Ontra 
Of a Conjunction. gh Bu 

Q. Hat is a Comjun@ion 2 + 


375. 4. A Conjunttion is a Word Which joynerh two rf | 


tences together; thus, 

276. The Bing comes, 
and et, que, atque 
al ſo, too quoque 

The Queen comes, 

377. Neither neque, nec 
the King comes 
nor neque, nec 
the Queen comes, 

378. Either aut, vel, ve 
the Ring comes 
or aut, vel, ve 
the Queen comes, 

5 The King comes not 


ths Queen comes, 
380. The Ring comes 
becauſe quia 
the Queen comes, 
oh The King will not come 
nam, enim 
the een comes not, 
392. The King comes 


sed, aſt, ar, autem 


the Queen comes, 


if if 
the Queen comes. 
383. The King comes not 
unleſs >. - By, abs 
the Dons comes, 
The King comes 
1 re ergo, igitur 
the Queen comes, 
385. Although quanquam 
the King comes, 
het, nevertheleſs ramen 
the RIEL comes not. : 
6 The King comes N. B 


that, a rhe end that, ut, üti of 
el 
the Nueen ſhould come. 0.4 
387. J heartily wiſh Þ HH 
that fir, ütinam 5 1 
the Queen would come. heir fi 
388. So ita 0 , 
the King comes | 393, 
as ac ay by 


HATE 


12 XII, XIII. — Wozd# Declined. 45 
5 8 CHAP: XII. 

PIL!) 22 | 

ws 2 e Interiedtidh bag 


ſence Hat 5 is an Inter jection ? a 
ah. | W 389, A, An Interjection is a Word which alone betokens 
bme meaning of our mind; as, 
tof ob! 51ͤĩð ö ĩ I | wailadayl wo! heil ve! 
ban 55 2 | Cho! heus! 20 piſh / 1 au! 
1 behyld ! en! ecce! buſh! whiſt/” Mi! au, &c. 

N. B. The Inte) Won are moſtly uſed to denote ſome ſudden paſſion of the 
bind. 5 
IN. B. Thus have you learned the eight forts of Words uſed in ſpeaking, now 
gell me wh:ch of theſe words are Nouns, which Pronouns, which Verbs, Ce. 


pith 


1 thou I ſuavis - ſweet 7-4 Ft that 
£20 YETI, CST. mess mine 
gemere to tremble | tamen yet | eſſe . 
phy! out up,n's | sölus alane en; 154 
ſemère raſhly I mülier a woman hic bere 
contra againſt | arbor 6 tree. Wy to run. 


CHAP: XIII. 


Sen 

: Concerning the Dec of i 7 Wd. 

OW that you have ſeen the eight Parts of Speech, you nuf next learn 

: which of them are declined; and which undeclined ; ; therefore, 
; G5 What is it to decline a Word? * 

390. A. To decline a Word is to turn it into divers endings. 

Q. To what purdoſe is a Word ſo turned into another ending? 

191. A. A Word is turned into another end ing to nority ſomething 
ore to us than it did before, fo that it not only ſignifies ſo or ſo, bur | ir 

! ſignifies that, and ſome what further; as, 


B. 
ot £ 


| homo a man 2 © homines men 
puer 4 byy >is turned i into piieri boys 
muſa a ſong ec mal#/ſongs 


N. B. x. Some Words in declining do increaſe and ſome do nf. 2. Ty ins 
1.4 f is to have more Syllables than it had be fore. | 
Q. May all ſorts of Words be ſo declined into other endings : ? | 
392. A. No Words that are Ad verbs, Conjunttons, Prepoſitions, or In- 
Erjefions can be thus turned into freſh en lings, but all ſuch Words keep 
Heir firſt end ing, and fo are undeclined, as ſemel, et, ad, heu. 

Q. Which Words then are they that be geclined ? 

393. 4. All Words that arg Nouns, or Pronouns, or Verbs, or Participles 
ly be declined, 


A PR N. B. So 


= Genders of Nouns. Chap. X1/Whap- - 


N. B. So then C Nouns and four Adverbs ec ma 
four ſorts ) Pronouns aye De- /orfs of Onjunct ions are Url mY 
of Words, Verbs C clined Words, Prep»ſttions clined Re fill 
VIZ. Participles | VIZ. and Interjedions IL 


Q. Are all the declined Wordt declined after the ſame manner? 
394. A. No, for Nouns, Pronouns and Participles are declined after u 
manner, , and Verbs are declined after another manner, 


HA P. XIV. 


_ The Declining of Nouns, Pronouns and P. ticiplesn. 


Q. H are Nouns, Pronouns and Patticiples turned into other ending; | 
| 395. 4. Nouns, Pronouns and Participles are changed into: 
nother ending. 
1. To en the Gender, as agnus an he- lamb, agna a ſhe lamb. 
2. To adſignify the Number, as homo one man, homines more men. 
3. To adſignify the Caſe, as homo a man, hominis of a man, &c. I f 
| | FF uen 0 
S. 1. Three Genders. 
Q. "Hyw many Genders are there ? | m_ 
396. 4. As of things there be three kinds, 1. fome males, 2, ſon 
females, 3, ſome neither males nor females. | 
So of the Words there are three ſorts, 1. ſome of the Maſculine Gend: 
2, ſome of the Feminine, 3. ſome of che Venter. 
= B. And theſe have often different endings to diſtinguiſh them one fu 
another. 


| the Maſculine Gender hic * : 
* k 4% the Feminine Gender 0 5 0 wa 3 * wo der 
the Neuter Grader | e ter- 
Vnati- 
§. Rules of the Genders of Subſtantives. ND TY 


Q. Which Words are of the Maſculine Gender? 
397. 4. R. I. Every Subſtantive that adſignifies a male, i is of the Mz 
culine Gender; as, | 


hic mas a male hic ſikus a {un 
hic vir. a man | hic ẽ Equus an horſe. 
hic Adamus Adam hic asinus an he · aſa 
hic Joannes Fohn hic agnus an be- lamb 
hie mãgiſter a maſter | hic Rex a King 
hic päter a fat ber hic pũer 4 boy, Ke. 


Q. Which Words are of the Feminine Gender ? 
298. A, R. II. Every Subſtantive that adſignifiẽs a female, is of i 
Feminine Gender ; as, 
hzc femina a female hæc Eva Eve 
hac müller 4 woman hac Joanna Foan 


ec migiſtra a miſtreſs hæc asina a ſhe- aſs. 
ec mater a mother | hæc agna 4 ſbe-lamb 


Ind! 
e 


T 0h 


1e Ma 


1 
, 


s oft 


1 


Genders. Numbers. 47 


8 — 


c filla a daughter hzc Regina 4 Queen 
c equa a mare hæc pueila. a girl, &c, 

Are there no Words of both the Maſculine and Feminine Gender? 
358 A. R. III. Every Subſtantive that ad ſignifies both the male and 
e female is ot the Common of two, that | is, it is both of the Maſculine and 


| rhe Feminine Gender; as, 


hic & hzc hæres an heir 


ie & hæc parens a parent 
| hic & hæc cuſtos a keeper * 


ic & hxc fur a thief 


ic & hac diix a guide | hic & hæc sũs an hog, &. 


o hic parens is an he- parent, or a father, hæc parens is 4 ſhe Taler, 


ra mot her, hic far an he-thief, hæc far a foe thief, &c. 


Q. Which Words are of the Neuter Gender? 

299. A. Every Subſtantive that adfignifies neither male nor female ſhould 
of the Neuter Gender, but they are not all fo; but ſome ſuchare of the 
euter, ſome of the Maſculine, tome of the Feminine, and ſome Doubtful. 


Q. Hine may I know which be of the Neuter, which of the e and | 


ich of the Feminine ? 


Maſculine : 
| | WET 07 | 
400. 4. In the vocabulary the? Neuter 
Common ye. 
Doubtful d. 


§. Rules for the Genders of Ad jectives. 


Q Of what Gender are Adjectives? 

401. A. All Words chat are Ad jectives areall of the three Genders, either 
: hic felix hic triſtis hic bonus 
Wder hæc felix Hor un- hc triſttis / or un- \ hzc bona 
We ter- Jhoc felix \_der - - Jhoc triſte der hoc bonum 


nati- Shic vétüs F two; S\hic ſuavis three; N hic malus 
b; as, Hhæc verus\, as, Clas ſuavis\ as, / hac mala 


hoc vetus hoc ſuave hoc malum 


8. 2. Of the two Numbers. 


Q. How many Numbers are there? 

| 402. A. There be two Numbers, the Singular and the Plural, For one 
a Singular Number, and more than one is a Plural Number. 

Q Which Words are of the Singular Num ber? 

403 A. Thoſe Words are of the Singular Number v which ſignifie buf 

z as, homo a man, pier @ boy, muſa a ſong. 

0 Which Words are of the Plural Number ? 
404. A. Thoſe Words are of the Plural Number which anific more 
an one; as, homines men, piteri bs, maſz ſon-s. 
Q of ih Wards following, which are of the Singular, ang which are of 
; ra 


terra 


3 * OT 


4 
1 
& 
1 
4 
1 
| 
* 
1 
. 
ö 


. * 1 nets 4 $ >" OY * — I 
K RE Le alienate” Fs ns OS AR AC IIS 7» 147 


, — AY 1 * + . * * 
_ I 4 - 6 * nr e reren 
. — 8 5 »— _ — _ — = was * 3 8 . 5 x. 5 % E 
WM . . e m3 Pc , 1 * BEA _ FETAL 3 * F 2 2 - * — 
b p , A CAS or > 6 n Key: = 5 
rr — — 2 wt 
. . 6 . 
| 4 2 WY 8 3 Rk „ 


* 


1 Cafes. Declenſons. Chap. XI 


— MN 
terra land fchola a ſchool diſcipili ibtt porta a gate 
arma arms whole art l diſeipülus 4 Ne mœnia wall, 


5. 3. Of the Six gate 


1 Hiw many Caſer's are there? 16 1 
405. 4. There be ſax Caſes. 


the Nominative the 44 aig 15! 80 d 
the Genitive Caſe Sthe Vocative SCaſe was 
the Dat ive the Ablative 


N. B. And the Caſ er have different endings to diſtinguiſh one from anoth 48 
2. And to decline a Noun, Pronoun or Participle, is to give the right e + N 
Yate of every Caſe in each Number, | 6. 
$3 D, 
9. 4. 07 the Five Derlenf ons. 4 4 
2. H m many ways are Nouns, Pronouns, and Participles „ 7 | js 

* 


406. 4. There ate five ways of declining Nouns, Pronouns and Parte 
ples, which are called the fte Declenſions. For tome are declined al 
the firſt way, ſome after the ſecond, ſome after the third, ſome alter t 
fourth, and ſome after the fifth. 
407. N. B. Here note theſe four things; that in every Declenſion 
1, The Vocative Singular is the ſame with the Nominative Singular. 
2. The Vocative Plural is ever the ſame with the Nom native Plural 
3. The Ablative Plural is ever the ſane with the Dative Plural. 
4. All Words of the Neuter Gender have their Nominative, Accuſat 
and Vocat ive alike in both Numbers, and in the Plural Number theſe th 
Caſes end j ina, 


I. The firſt Declenſion. 
Q. "Hat Words are of the firſt Declenſin? 
408. 4. Words in à are of the firſt Declenſion, 
Q. V are they declined ? 


409. A, Words of the firſt Declenſion have their 414. 
Nominat ive üs che 


| a Nominative * f 
Genitive XZ | Genitive 0 ar um pa ” 
Dative of the Singular Jz | Dafive of the Plural Jis [£40 « 


Accuſative Number in Jam { Accuſative ED in Ras | Q Gi 


Vocativfe \ © a Vocative * 
Ablative ( a Ablative 18 a 
Q. Give me ſome Exemples of Words thus declined - Y EN. 1 
410. 4. 6. 
| N. hæc muſ a a ſong. N. mul-z ſongs 05 
Sg. muſ æ of a ſong 6, muſ ãrum of ſongs (WS 4. 
. JD. muſt to a /ong A JD; muſ-is to ſongs V. 
S 4. muſ-am 4 ſong J. mauſ-as ſorge 46. 
C. o mul-i o ſong | 0 o muſ-æ o ſongs do dec 


Ab, mul-a by a jong Ab, muſ-1s by ſongs 


XUE hap. XIV. The Second Declenion. 49 
e Wh decline menſa, terra, umbra, natüra, N prũna, toc. 
„ bac anim-a 4 ſoul . anim-z ſouls _ / 
| G. änim- 22 of a ſoul 0 8 anim arum of eule 
S JD, agim & tqaſoul 2 . anim-ĩs to ſouls .t ” © 


JA.  anim-am a ſoul Aaänim.as ſouls, ,": 
05 o anim-a 9 /0u! 8 8 0 0. anim-æ 0 fonts © © 
Ab. anima by a ſoul _ animes by ſouls 

So decline materia, beſtia, minèra, femina, and all in 4. 

Q. Are no Words of the firſt Declenſi ion but thoſe that end in a? 

411. A. Some few Words in as, as Satänas, Lucas, Thomas, are of this 
rſt Declenſion, and make their Voc, hg in a long; ö AS, 

EN. hic Satan-as Satan 


6. Siran-Z of Satan 
JF Sitan J Gabon N. B. Words of the # /t Deelenſion, 


11 Siran-am Sat you (ee, do not increaſe in any 
7, 0. Satan-a 0 er. ä | Caſe ſave the Genitive Plural. 


noth 
ht er 


PF, 
Artie 
4 al 


er II. The Second Declenſion. . 


. Hich Words are of the ſec a Declenſion 2 5 
wap W 412. 4. All of th oe um, and thoſe in er and 18 chat are 
J. [{arked in the Vocabulary with i are of the Second Declenſion. 
at Q How are Words of the Second Declenſion declined? 
% 413. 4. Words of the Second Declenſion have their | 
"mM. "is, Er or Um Nom. 0 but Next. in 4 
ven. in the Plu- ye: 1 8 


en, l 
44. 6 Dat.“ > os 
gular Num- 7 ral Num os Neut. in a 


in the Sin A. 
um Ae. vent. 
oc, 50 ber in 65 er or am | Voc. ber in Ui and Neuf. in a 
bl, oth Qu 155 I Abl.. e 4 


Q. But here the V ocat ive Singular is not ever like the N minative. 
414. 4. Note, That when the Nominative in the Second Declenſion an 
us che Vocative Singular endeth in &, as hic Domlaiis a Lord, Voc. o 
om ne o Lord, E xcept Deus, o Deus; bur filizs and Proper Names in jus 


um 

ſtead of ie have i, 28 o fili, Antonius o Antoni, Georgius G Georgi, 

- ive ne Jome Exemples of Words fo declined: * got 4 
nd 1 

| 413. I. 'Exemples of Words in its." 


N. + mand-j worlds 1 
münd -S rum of 2 


6. mund-i of the wild HM 

D. . mund-is to worlds , 
A. 

* 


JD. miind-d to the world 
ongs J. mind-am the world 
75 o mund-Z o the world. o milad-j o world 

mind-Q by the world Ab. miund-rs by worlds. 

S decline Deũs, mödus, löcus, cryſtallus, ſapphirus, rubinus, Cre. 


CY hic mand-is the world 


* 
. münd-õs worlds. 


D . Singular 


E The Second Declenſion- Chap. X1\{Whap. 
I. hoon fd” oe contin WM 
> AG. dqͤmin. 1% 4 brd 6, domin-orum of lord, 
Jb. doömin 0 ½ 4 ler? * o. domin-Is to lords 

JA. d6min- wy e ford” | 8 J4 d6min-65s, lord: 

WG 


. 0 dòmin . e 0- ord +> 7 ©; { V. * 0 domin.1 0 lord 
Ab. dòõmin. o by 4 N 1 Ab. domin Is by lords. 
So 4e nümerus, dogslos, animus, and all in us marked (1% 


415 Il, Wards in Er. ; 


W. mY per 4 121 CV. pũer- 5% _ 
8 5 pur | i. of 4 by . | 2 * pükt. rum of boys 420, 
_ rüer. 0 7 4 biy o. puer. 18 70 boys om. 
27 4 A, puter um 4 by D 4 Ars) puer · ö bys 7 
oy pe” o piier o Sant | V.. ©. pler io bys : 
456. puër-o by 4 5⁰ 56 Ab, puter is by boys Dt. 5 


4417: N. B. There are ſix Subſtantiſes that thus increa'e ſh»t, puer, adilce. | 
ter, presbyter, s6cer, gt and vir vici, al thereſt d nat ircreaſe, ib. 


N. hic lib-er a bk = FN, lib ri books 2. 6 

8 | G. lid ri of a book a | uk en of books 421. 

J D. lib-ro #0 4 % D. libris ft boz#s 1. 0 

87 A, lib- rum a beo is A. lib rös books 2. Of 

S V. o libero book. | V. o lib-ri o books 3.0 
Av. lib ris by books FE 


| 7 lib-ro by a book: | 

80 1 7 cancer, caper, Ager, ſäber, Tulter. 

CN. hic magiſt-er a maſter CN, magilt-ri maflers 
E. migiſt ri of a maſter, 5 G. magiſt-rõrum of maſie 
D. magiſt-ro f a paler... 2 5% magiſt ris t maſters Q 
; | 


3 magilt- rum a mater A. muaglit-r6s maſters 
V. o magiſt-ri o maſters 
4 


. 0 magiit er o maſter 
b, ein ris by mh 


1 magilt-ro by a "maſter 
80 decline miniſte. 
N. B. Tbus fur the Aecuſative Plural is 4 ferent from the Nominati 
Plural, but in the ways of declining to come, the Accuſat hve Plural is 
ſame with the Nominative and Vocative Plural. 


5 418. III. Wards 1 in um. 
N, hoe regn-um a hingdom - CN.  regn-i dingdoms 
'G. regt-i of a: Kingdom a | 6+ - regn-orum of kingdom 
S 7 D. regn-1s t &.ngdoms 
* TA. regu à kingdoms 
o regu - um o Kind V. o regn-a o kingdoms 
Ab. TEgh-o by a kingdom 446. regh-is by Kingdoms 
E decline ſignum, ſparium, membrum, and all In um. 
N. B. Fr nikiilum in the Nomjnative and Accuſatiue they oft ſay nyhil ; 
and nil. And ſo much Ae the {riod Nele ge. 1 12 5 


* 


4 
[ D. regn o to ; kingdom 

4 A, regu um 4 Kingdom 

„. 


Ku hap. XIV. The Third Declenflon. = 51 


4. III. The Third Declenſion. 5 


M Hich Words are declined after the third way? 
419. 4. All Words & in © , n and 3 
anne, Sg 
in as, is, os and s with a Conſonaat be- 
fore it, and moſt ending in er, es and us are of the third Declenſion. 
Q. How are theſe turned into the right ending of every Caſe ? 
420. 4. Words of the Third Declenfion have their 


174 Tenn he. oo | LS, Neut. in à 
: | in the Sin- 4 * | inthe Plu- | & | 
e P gular Num e x Ae oral Numc 4 * 
| af, b ber in 1 Dat. ber in ibus | ; 
) adu cc. | Em Acc, | | Es, and Neut. in à 
„ 10 Il. . 451. bus 


— 
| Q. Give me ſome Exemples of Wards ſo declined? 
421. 4. Here follow Erempleg of three ſorts; 
| 1, Of Words that do not increaſe in che Genit. as mire miris. | 
2. Of Words that increaſe with the laſtSyl. but one long, as virtũs, virtũtis. 
3. Of Words that increaſe with that Syllable ſhorr, as lapis, lipidiz 


I. Exemples of Words not Increaſings 


pete | Q Which Words in the third Declenſion do not increaſe in the Genitive Sins 
lar? 

Ki 422, A. All Words ending in e. and moſt in & and js do not increaſe 

lere the Genitive Singular, and theſe make the Genitive Plural in ium. 


e N. hoc t̃ẽt-e 4 net EN, ret - ia nets 


3 2 0. ret is of à net 6. ret ium of net. 
nat ln. ret. i 70 4 net | Ip. frer-jbus fo nefs 
L155 4c reve a net FS 4 Ac. ret-ia nets. 

V. o ret-e o net . o reti ia o nere 
Ab, ret. i by a net © | | 46. ret-jbus by nets 


N. B. Inſtead of lade in the Nom. Accuſ. and Voc. they uſe lac, buf no Plus 
Q But here the Ablative does not end ine as it ſhould do. 3 
423. 4. Neuters in e make the Ablative in i, and the Nominatire 
ural in ia. | : 2 | 

| So decline mire, altire, and all ine. 


_ . { Nchzc nũb- FN. es. is N hæc peſt e © 
| 5 * 8 | G. -wm G. 1s | 
W iS |D. Abus JD. 12 
ihi | Ac, Em — Ac. -es Ae | em 7 * 
ly, ey, acl, - 
| 4Þ & | 46. -tbus| | 1.46. . 


4 Hs | þr? — 
»R So decline yulpes, fimes, 5:des, ſinis, poſits, panis, e 


D 


The Fourth Teclenfion. f 


424. II. N „ Words that increaſe long. 


N. & N. & 


»a 4 
| dre 1 XY ores | ” ferm 0 V. 1 
J ; — F. N 0 | — | 
V G. -r isl = | G. -orumj=S )6. -onis| £ G. 7. nun 
SJ D. f 8 3 b. BE 10. nig YD. -onibuſif 
O14, rem A. Frese (4.  -onem A. -onef 
5 46 Ab. dr! bus Ab. - One Ab. -oniu 


Fo decline col-gr-oris, anim -gl-alis, ver-veris, æſt- ãs atis, tell. ũs. uri 


leo leõnis, lig-0-0nis mõs moris, adam as antis, &. 


425. III. Exemples of Words dag ing ſhort. 


E- * » 
#+ &\ hic lap-is| | - 8K b. des 3 7 mib-&s a ſoldier 
F r 5 8 
= dig s 6. dum 6. mil 12s of A ſoldier 
* [3. id I 7 D. -1dibus $99 mil iti to 4 f laier 
8 Ac. idem 4e. tes 6 4k. m:].irem a [o'dter 
[ 46. „del { 45. Idibus ' 46, mil Ite i a ſolder, & 
So decline paſtèr is, jud ex- icis, ord o Inis, virg-0- woo Cee. 
N. O hoc | MA; ' eo N.J hoc . 
05 corp üs. \ 4. >corp 0:4 & \ A. nõm 5 2 05 ox 
= * MN a body . 7.0 bodies 7 fV.N a name JJ names 
& JG. cörp.öris S Ie. corp. örum & A6. -inisS 4 \nu! 
% . corp ah! D. corp oribus “ / D. ini / D. -+inibi 
\. Ab, corp-ore A. corp oribus Ab. ine Ab. inlbe 
80 decline gen Us Eris, cap Ut iris, pond-fis-Eris, alũm En-Inis, Cc. 


. The Fourth Birke ron. 


'Q. V Hich Words are declined aſter the fourth way? 
426. 4. All Subſtantives in u, and many in is are of th 
fourth Declenſion. 
Q. Vom are the Words in ts declined ? 


Chap. XIV 


8 l ar 


P 
SE 


*%. k way % 


427. A. Words in 45 have their 1 . 
Nom. üt iVm. TH! V. fradtis 
Gen. 4 (ben. / = I an I (G (6. fru du 
Dat. C3 ) uſDat. C ) ibuS JL D. Ffraftibu 
Acc. ( 5 Jüm Acc. ( u S JA. EZ Jac. fraQus 
Voc. IS / wile. NE {ir ao Y 0 ia FV. o fruttus 
451. d Al. ibu 46. fri) 45. frudibe 


80 decline ſpiritüs, laciis, and all in tis marked (üs). 
Q. How are Words in u declined 2 


428. 4. Words in u in the Singular have all their Gaſes in 1, - and! 


hs Plural have the NV. J. de in ua, 6 in uum, V. and 051 in bus. 
So decline genu and coruu. 2 


* 4 14 
0 * 9 
% 


+ 1 2 


V. 


hap 


| 


Plurai 


k 4 Pm © wr HQ 


> 
2 
a 


he Ge 


Ey 


hap. XIV 


The Fifth Declenſion. 53 


— 


\ 


v. The Fi 7 Declenſion. 


Ones * 

x bref Words are F the Fifih'Dec'enſin? 5 
num 429. 4. Res, ſpes, and fides faith, and moſt Subſlantives in 
ww | 5 are of the fiſth Declenfion 


one Q. How are the Words of the Fifch Declenſimn declined in all Caſes: 2 
iu 430. 4 Words of che Fifth Declenfion have their 
urs. F eV. 2 N. hac ſaci ẽs 05 ee 
| 7 ©! fe. J © G. faci-61 5 -erum 
E * faci- si 2 8 bus 


7 Crum faci em 8 3 A 20 y.-03. 
Se = 8 o faci-@s I K. 8 - C5 

— eb » — — 
30 og 5 85 7 i s =. ſaci 8 A0. c hus 


* 
ingular in 
Fa 
[ 
D* 
1 
bg, . 
ral in 
LN 
AN 
* 
Fuga. 4 


. 


dier 80 decline dies, acies, and 4 ſpes, fides, but theſe three make rei 
er Mpti, fidei, ſhort in the Genitive and Dative Singular. 

ter I Q Now give me the endings of every Ciſe in every Declenſrin $ © - 

er, &. 431. A. The Endings of every Caſe in every Declenſion. 


ok a. - r 


--4 De. 11 I. Dec. 1 III. Declenſron. 55 I Dy. Dy 
i Nom a, a as it us, er um „, n, Ar, öt, ür uc a, 18. 0% 7.48, 1 Es 25 
r Voc. a, 4 7 um : eln, o, ar, or, ur, ur, as, is, os 12 is, u fes 
en. | X 1 15 | ſus, 1 | C1 
Ws Dat. | # 5 I ſäi, uf of 
Pee 2 O. am um Em oy im {10,0 | em | 
eis. L or ſu uje | 
Ce. Nen. T i N. 2 7 es V a or ia fis, ua & 
Voc. * | 1 N. a es N. ä or 1a | uu | es |. 
en. | arum | 5rum um 07 ium tian erum 
I Dat. | 15 15 ibus tous | cbus 
Aer. „ as | 0s N. a | ES N. A or ia ſus, ua 
of ib Ahl. 15 15 jbus . „ Se 
Q. Hwmethen ſhall we non of wh! h Dec Ow any w W wd i is? 
432. 4. By the ending of cach Caſe, but eſpecially by the ending of 
'Þ he Genit.ve Singular; thus 
atrs | . | Firſt 
ai Every Word i (in the Gents. Second \ 
übe chat hach Lis 2 Singular is < Third Declenfion 
1Hus 05 \ of che Fourth\ | 
actus ei Fifth 
üct be 


N. B. Now 29 back and tell me what Declenſion every Mun gabſtant! ve is of. 
Q Are all Nouns, Pronouns and Participles declined after one "of theſe Froe 
eclenſions 2 

and! 433 4, There are three Pronouns, ego, tu, ſui, otheriviſe declined; 60 715 
. 


D 3 | S- 


V. 


54 _ Declining of Adjectives. Chap XIV 


0 —_—_— 


_— 


85 Nom. Ego J Nom. nos we 

I en. mei of me Nen. noſtrum or noſtri of | 
Sat. mihi zo me S Dat. nG6bis tous x 
Acc. meme K J}Acc. nos us G 
4 4bl. me by me (4. nobisbyus 5 
Nom, tu thou or you Vom. vos ye or you < 4 
en. tui of thee — Gen, veſtrumor veſtri of y 
Dat. tlhbi to thee & JDat. vobis to you 4 

ec. tꝛẽ thee RY Acc. vGOsye or you 
| N WJ So e 
Voc. o tu o thou Voc, o vos o he N.“ 
Abl. te by thee Abl. vobis by you 85 0 
Na. „ Nom. —d bigra 
E \Gen. ſui of ones ſelf 1 \Gen. ſui of themſelves Q: 
Ws Dat. ſibi to ones ſelf 2 Dat. fibi to themſelves 437 
= JAcc, ſe ones ſelf Acc. ſe themſelves 10K. 


4. ſe by ones ſelf 40. fe by themſelves ne g 
434. N. B. Tor, quot, quatuor, Cc. (ſee number 226.) are not declined : 


all, and ſatis, nimis and cras are uſed only in the Nom. and Accuſ. Singular 
And mane in the Nom, Acc. and Abl. Singular. e 


F. The Declining of AdjeFives. 


Q Are all Adjectives declined after one of theſe frue Declenſions? 

435. 4. All Adjectives are declined after the Firit and Second Declcr 
ſion, or after the Third. 
Q. What Adjectives are of the Firſt and Second Declenſion 2? | 

436. 4. Adjectives in us, a, um, and er, a, um, are of the Firſt an 
Second Declenſion, and be thus declined, all three Genders together. 


 Adjeflives of the Firſt and Second Declenſiun. c. 


> SST NXS SGA? 


438. 

I. In us a um. ſo th 

m. 1 m. F. v. 

N. bonus bona bonum N. boni bonæ bona T 4 

& AG. boni bonz boni by G. bonorum bonarum bonòtuſð 4 
E D. bono bonæ bono * JD. bonis bonis bons þ 1 
.& J4. bonum bonam bonum j = JA, bonds bonãs bona 3 
. bone bona bonum | V, boni bonæ bona is 
Ab. bono bona bono A, bonis bonis bonis NV. 
N. B. Where you ſee the Maſc. and Neut. are of the Second, and the Fei 1 
of the Firſt Declenſion. th 4 
So decline malus, probus, and all in us (except vetus) and Participles in 1 
as amand-us-a-um, amat · us- a- um, hut meus mea meum hath in the Vocati ( 4 


Sing. mi mea meum, and for ſaturus they iſe ſatur. a- um, 
AR II, 46 


XIV 


— 5 


hap. XIV. 


1 ofix hy 
NV. lib-&r 
G. Sci 
D. Sco 

5 Ac. ru 

of % /V/, -&r 
45. Fro 


_ Dechi Ang ot Adjertibes. 55 
1 . Adjeflives In Elten erum. v2 j 
3 . in. 7 wo 
dra rum N lib eri 1 
-&#x eri [|_ AIG, Lrörum ttarum Uſe 
-Erx Exo | JD. Aris © = tl 
m Ecrim rum \ Ac. Exos Kras f 
tra rum Nen eee e 
Sta xo Ab. -eris Tris ; as 


So decline proſper, mifer, aſper, tener, dexter, ſiniffer, acer ind ger. 
N. B. But ſome caſt ff th: ſbeyt e, and abe er 11 rum, fx ri, We. 
So decline niger, pulcer, ruber, \ucer, Ager, macer, piget ; thas niger 


Ti 
es 
5 
ned = 7 
gulat N. un us =2 
N 6. ius ius | 
— D. 4 -1 4 
= Ac. -um am G 
Fo u 
Ab. -0 -4 
eclet e . 
N. alter altera 
8 Ge alter. jus ius 
ſt and D. a'TEr-1 i 
her, WE 4c. a'rer-um am 
F. alter 1 
Ab. älter-o 22 
o 
N. We 
r > G. illius illius illius 
nörun n vh vj 
TE . Ac. lum 
1 | 
1a 5 f | 
0 Ab. illo illa illo, cc. 
11S N. hie hæc 
G. hüjus hüjus 
Fend | 
F Q D. huic huic 
inn 4. hune hanc 
I. _— ——— 5 
uy | * * 
Adj 


pigra nigrum, G. nigri ngræ nigri, Cc. 

Q: Are all Aadjeives in us a um, and er a um thug teclined 2 | 
437. A. There are certain Adjettives of another manner of declining in 
wo Caſes, for they make the Gen. Sing. in ius, the Hat in i, which be the ſe 
ine that follow, anus, torus, [ölus, ullus, nullus, A ius, alter; mer, neuter. 


n. 
um & decline torus, ſofos, Ades ad 
-ius nullus; bt alius alia and 4 little 
-1 otherwiſe, thus 
um | IN. ali üs 1 w_ 
am Sing. GE. al.ius as ius 
-o, Cc. D. ali-i 14, Ce. 
n. J — - Owner 
a'rerum | 8 CN, uter otra riot 
-ius J JG: utrius utrius utrius 
1 8D. tri utri „r 
um (Ac. utrum utram utrum, Fc. 
um Sy dec line nc uter. 2 


o, Cc. 


N Are there any more Adjedſdes beſides theſe nine Th declined 2 
438. 4. Theſe Pronouns ille, ipſe, iſte, hic, is, qui, quis and quid have 
ilſo their Genitive Singular in ius, and the ir Dative in 4, 


iſtius iſtius iſtius | ipſius ipfius ipſius 


Ha illud 40 iſta iſtud þ ipſe pſa ipſum 


iſti ili jfti_|iph ip ipfi 


—— — 


illam illud 125 iſlam iftud (5 ipfam ipfum 


iſto iſa iſto | ipſo, Ge. 


hgc this N. hi he hæc 
büjus 6. hörum haram Forum 
huic | V D. his his his 
hoe ie. nd has hac 
| 2 Vi. | — 9 . 
hge b his his bis 


D 4 _—_ Singulas 


Declining of Adjectives: — Chap. X11 Mhap. X 
Is N Nit e Ed 


&jus ©Jus ejus | (, cõrum carum evorum 
1 e! ei g JD, eis or ĩis eis or lis eis or ii 6. 
J. eum eam id |= YAc. eds cas ea D. 
4. e 3 45. eis or iis, Ge. 7 
N. idem cädem dem MN, jidem | exdem cädem Ab. 
.. ẽjuſdem ẽjuſdem e juſdemſ. . eõründem eãtundem cõrunden So dec 
2. eidem eidem eidem ED. eiſdem ar uſdem, CC 44. /. 
| Ac, .cyndem eandem idem J 34. eoſdem eaſdem eadem N. 
(. idem eädem idem . iidem | exdem _ cidem (6. 
Ab. eõdem eãdem eõdem A eiſdem or lildem, Ce. D. 
V. qut- quæ -quod ! „ N. qui que quæ Ac. 
»G./'-cujus cujus cujus 6. qu rum quarum quorum V. 
JD. cui cui cui ECO quibus cr quis, c. 40. 
Ne quem quam quod (. Ac. Quos | quãs quæ 
Ab, quo qua quo 4. quibus quibus quibus N 
r QUE. O01 or quis quiz quis 7551 
80 decline quidam quædam quoddam, C. cujuldam, c. and quis que g. 
quod, G. cujus, c. and quid, 6. cujus, D. cui, Ac. quid, Ce. D. 
Are tbere yet no more Adjectiues otherwiſe declined? 1. 
439. 4. There are two more Adjettives yet, ambo both, and duo tw! 4b, 
which becauſe they always beroken more thin one, therefore want the 8d dec 
Singular ande and in the Plural are thus declined, , & Pare 
2110177 m. e at. * Fr L442. N 
4 V3 1 : L : o N. 2 2 3 ur. dec 
2. Pinbe 80 fin y, Pdũo diz dũo perl. 
3 drum drum -orum - duorum duarum dusrum . plur: 


ED | 


* 
20S -abus -obus BD _ duobus duabus duobus 
* (4 l en ol | 4. duos duãs duo 
Ab. — 4k abus -obus: C40. duobus duãbus 'duovLus 


' | Adjefives of the Third Declenſion. 


* Which Adjectives are of the Third Declenſiun? 
440. 4 All that are nor of the Firſt and Second are : Of the Third j 
and theſe are of three lorts. 


PRs I, Adjedtir es not increaſing. 


Q. What AdjeFives do not increaſe in the Genirive Singular? 
1 4 & Adjettives | in is is 8 and! in er ris re don not 5 a, 


* 22 


. 


1 


7 Mhap. XIV. Declining of Adjectives: F557 


um 
i ik 


1 
dem 


|| 0 
1 


rum 
bus 


bus 


ird; 


. Mov $9 
— * * — 77... ?mÜ!ůkdU 
- * . 
. 


r 8 | m. 11 
N. triſt-is -15 © VN. triſt-es es ia 
3 s ty 6. ium zium om 
D. "of -1 E bus -ibus Abus 
Ac, r SS ia 
J. 15 e Cr. des A 
. 8 3 45. -Ibus bus bus 


So decline qualis, talis, fmilis, utilis, and all 4 je. Fives i in is, and Plural 
Ac. V. tres tres tria, G. trium, D and 45. tribus. 


NV. acer acris gacre N. actes acres: acria 
. acris acris acris 2 6. acrium acrium acrium 
JD, acri acri acri D. äcribus acribus acribus 
FN 4c.-acrem acrem acre 2 Ac. actes acres. acria 
( acer aciis acre----1 FV. acres - teres act 
Ab, acii acri acri | Ab. acribus acribus acribus 
442. II. Adj2&:ves increaſing long. 
m. J. . m. n. 
. ge IT [ N. 
7 plelix ſex (clix _ \ac.>felices felices felicia 
6. feljcis felicis felicis 8 A Ds 
D. felici feiici  feljci * folie lum felicium, Cc. 


Ac. felicem felicem felix | 
A5. ſelice or felici, gc | Fe lic bus telicibus, c. 
So decline cujas, noſtras, veſtras àtis, che ſapiens, frequens- entis, 

d Participles in ans and ens, as amaus agtis, doc ens-entis. 

443. N. B. Hoc plus 17 4 Subſtantive ! in the Sing, ard in Aagjedive in the 
ur. declined thus, Sing. N. A. Voc, hoc plus, G - Pler's, D. pluri, 4b. plure 
plurt. Plur. N. Ac. 7. plures plures plura or pluria, G. Purim, D. and 
þ, plur ibus. 


444. III. Adjectives increaſing ſhort, 


m. F. n, „ ts 
1 veétüs vetus vetus 65 pa 
4” OR bob : | > Ac. > veteres veteres vetira 
6. n 2 8 2 8 
D. vet, Cc. = Js vetcrum, Cc. 


Ac. veterem vetèrem Veils | . 2 
. vereribus "A 
(45 VEtere or veteri, Cc. | 4b, © „ 


So decline par paris and impar imperis, hebes heberis, dives divltis, 
wuptr is, only they make the Nom, Plural ia, the Gen. um. 
N. B. Now turn back tothe Chapter of Aaject. and decline every one rights 


$ . Three Degrees of Compariſon. 


Axe theſe all the ways that Adjefives are turned into other endings. 7 
445, A. Some Adjectiyes are yer turned into other endings in jor, and 
1 $0 make compariton berweearhings, as that one thing is ſuch, ano- 

ther 


— — — , ⏑ . ⏑ 1 22 n 


K tid ©. * 1 CE ob a 
0 1 a F « 1 99 
: K = A * 9 * 2 9 
— — 6 - o 22 - PR” FIG"? * — — _— = * 
r * 2 — * * — Sn % DT — r "IF" 4 
— . 3 2 r nn * 
2 — >. Pe Op ODE, IF oe „ , » 
> 2g _ . 4 p - 
* - - IE , 
— rr * 11 — 
, * * — — —„-ů a 
ꝗ— — — 


| 58 Comparing of Adſettibes. 


rher i: is more Tack, another | is moſt ſuch, ſo of three hard chings, one is har Q  Whi 


che Comparative, and the Superlat' ve. 


Chap. XIYÞ#p-- . 


another is more hard, a third is hardeſt of all. 
_Q How many Degrees of Compariſon are there? 
446. 4. There are three Degrees of Compariſon; the Peſitive Degre 


453. 4 
q. 
bonus 
malus 
Q. Shew me the nature of each of theſe, and how they differ? magnus 
447. 4. An Adjective of parvus 

1. The Pofitive Degree betokens a thing to be ſimply fuch, as durus hart multus 
Iz. The Comparative betokens it to be moſt ſuch, as durior harder multa 


| more hard, multum 
3. The Superlative betokens ir to be mf? ſuch, as duriſſimos bardeſt N. The” 
; moſt hard. . Hy 


N. B. All the Adjetives that n have hitherto beard f ave of the Poſirint 454. . 


Degree, and now from it you muſt learn to form the Compirarive and us; 
Superlative. 


Q. May all Adjeives form Degrees of Compariſon ? NT 


448. 4. No; foronly thoſe Adjectis es by which we may ſay one thin 1 
is ſ ch, another is more ſuch, and another is moſt ſuch, may form Compari| T. 

Bur thoſe by which we cannot ſay ode is ſuch, another more ſuch, a 
anothet moſt ſuch, cannot form Compariſon; as omnis all, unus one, tort Ac. 
three ones, we cannot ſay, one is one, another more one, and another n ( 46 


one, Cc. II. Su 
Q. Hw are the Crmparative and Superlative Degr ees formed from fl 
Poſitive? | 
449. <. The Pofirive i is to be declined to the Ablative Singular, a: 
then the laft Vowel of that 451, Caſe is to be turned into 
<0 for the Comparative, 
VLilimus for the Superlative. So 
Poſitive Comparative Superlative. 
durus bard, Ab, dur-o | dur jor harder dur iſſimus bayde/? 
triſtis ſas Ab. rriſt-1 | rriſt ior ſadder triſt iſſimus [adde/? 


felix happy Ab. felic-e.| felic-ior happier felic-· iſſimus bappie/t 
Q. Are all thus compared: " | 


450. A, No; there are three Exceptions. 


451. I. If the Poſicive end in er the Superlative is formed pom ic 4755 

Putting to ir rjimus (but the Comparative is right) as he 

Poſ. Comp. Superl, The 
paicer pulerior pulcerrimus fair fairer faiveft. 
rener renerjor renerrimus tender renderer tender: 


Q Which is the ſecond Exception ? 
452. 4. II. Five Words ending in lis make the as ety by chant & * 


ing Ls into /7mus; as, | 456. 
Poſ. Comp. Super J. | L TT 
hümilis humitior _humillijmus humble mote —— moſt - does 
<1mi!is ſimilior fimillimus like "Hiker liket U. T 
diſsimilis diſſimilior diſſimillimus unlike more — moſt do, 
facilis facilior facillimus. _ eaſie eaſier eaſieſt MIL. 
difficilis difficilior difficiltimus d Heult more moſt I t, 


Q. Wh 


ap. XV. Declining of Verbs. 59 


_ 


ho ich is the third Exception? 
453. 4. From the General Rule are excepred theth chat follow, 

| Pip. Comp. Superl, 

egtet bonus melior optimus geod better beſt 
maſus pe jor peſsimus bad worle worſt of all 
magnus major maximus great greater greateſt 
parvus minor minimvs little leſs leaſt of all 

har multus plürimus Y | | | 8 

4er multa piurima , much more moſt 
multum plus plurimum | 


7-7 N. B. Now turn again to the Chaptet of ad jectives, and compare them, 
Q. m are Comparatives and Superlatives declined? 
oſitiſß 454. 4. I. The Comparatives are all declined in the third Declenſſon, 


nd t| us; 


= £ ' HY dos ; 
NY . s 2 . N <= : 4 
* Lqduri-or duri-or duri-us A 5 pn 
thin J. 9 2 bs” = wine Ki + böres res Ora 
471 . Dein Sen Gris 1 
þ —ꝓ— a # —_ + * 4 — -_ 
„, at D, „ 55 drum drum rum 
tore rem Hrem uus 4 | 
In 4 dre or ori, Cc. Ab. Vörlbu, Oc. 


II. Superlatives are declined like bonus, as duriſfim-us-a-um, G-i-z-i i, Cc. 


C:H-A-P, XV. 
The Declining of Verbs. 


us yau have learned to decline Nouns, Pronouns and Participles, ns 

tell me, Why are Verbs declined into other endings ? 
455. 4. The Verbs ſer down in Chap. VII. ſignify barely to be or to have 
Ee, to de or % have done, &c. And are Infinite, i. e. not confined to one 


eff r{on, 
but now they are to be declined into other endings to adſigniß 
The Md or manner that we ufe them in, And ſo they become F. 


ic h. The Time when a thing is, or aves, or ſuffers, nite, i. e. confined ro one 
. The Number of them that be, do, or ſuffer, C Perſon,of one Number, ot 
The Per/on that is, does, or ſuffers, Jone Time, of one Mood, 


16e §. 1. Three Moods. 


1118 Vn mam Moods or Manners in which we uſe Verbs are there? 

| 456. 4. Beſides the Infinite there be Three Moods. 

I. The Indicative Mood, which we uſe when we declare that ſomething 
„does, or ſuffers, as cœno I /up, or I do ſup. 

l. The Imperative Mood, which we uſe when we bid ſomething to be, 
d do, or to ſuffer, as cena ſup they, 

I. The SubjunFive Mood, which we uſe to ſubjoin to another Verb with 


l that, ſi i, Cc. between them, as Velle ur cœnem, t deſire r ſop. 


+> JF 


2 


hap. - 


= "Declining of Uerbs. Cpap. N. 
Ni. B. The Subjun&ive. Mood is ſometimes engliſhed by nay, might, ca 


. And 2 
could, would or ſhould. | te Fir 
N. B. Theſe Moods muſt have different endings to d ſtinguiſh one from anthe , « Sect 

Ra, No Boe THEE he Thi 
F.. 2. Twice-Three Times or Tenſes. And t 


Q. How many Times are there wherein one is, or does, or ſuffers ? N 
457: 4, There be Three Times or Tenſes, 1 | 8 I | 
I. The Preſent Time, that now is. | 
II. The Preter Time, that is paſt, 
III. The Future Time, that is yet to come. oo 
N. B. So ſome endings are of the Prejent Tenſe, ſome of the Prater, ard mi 
bf the Future, and theſe are different to diſtinguiſh one Time from anther, 
Q. But you ſaid above, that there were Twice-three Tenſes. 461. 
458. 4, Yes, becauſe (as you heard Ch. VII. S 6.) ſome Verbs ſignify In in e⸗ 
perfectly to be a doing, as cœnare to ſup or to be at ſupper, and others Per fed QA: 


Q. As 


arn t1 | 
nia. 


to have done it, as cœnaviſſe to have jupped; therefore there are Twice th 462. 
Tenſes, three of the Imperfec, and three of the Perfe#. | 
r. The Preſent of the Imperfe??, as cœno I ſup, or am at ſupter non 
but have not yet done it. | | 
2. The Preter of the Imperfect, as cœnãbam I was at ſupper then, b 
had not done it. 
3. The Future of the Imperfef, as coenibo I ſhall ſup, or (hall be 4 ſu 
per hereafter, but not that I thall have done ir, . H. 
4. The Preſent of the Perfe#, as cœnãvi I have ſupped, and it is now dot 493: 
5. The Preter of the Perfect, as coendveram I had then ſupted, and it wife Four 
then done. 
6. The Future of the PerſeF, as coenavero I ſhall hve ſrpped, and ſhi 
have done it. 5 
N. B. 1. The Preſent of the Perfed is commonly called the Preter-ferfeÞ 
2. And the Preter of the Perfect is common y called th: Preter-plu per fi Q WI 
. 54. 4. 
F. 3. Two Numbers, Singular and Plural. 2 
Q. How many Numbers are there? a 
459. A. There are Two Numbers, the Singular and the Plural, and ſ 
ſome endings of Verbs are of the Singular and ſome of the Plural, as Sin 
Ego cœno I ſup, Plu. nos cœnãmus we ſup. \ bo 
And theſe endirgs are different to diſtinguiſh the Singular from the Plural 1 : 
2 Vs | | a ia e. 
F. 4. Three Perſons. iP, 
Q. m many Perſons are there? . OM 
460. A. There be Three Perſons ; the Firſt, the Second and the Thirak 300 
I. The Firſt Perſon is that which ſpeaketh of it ſelf, as Ego 7, nos wil - 
II. The Second Perſon is that which is ſpoken, to, as Tu thou, vos 5e. e 
III. The Third Perſon is that which neither ſpeaketh ol it ſelf, nor! OY 
{poken to, bur is ſpoken of, as ille he, illi they, &c, ' Ot 1 


em 


Al 


&:rn t) Conjugate or Decline a Verb in all its Perſons, 


hap. XV. 


Declining of Uerbs.- 


And accordingly ſome endings of Verbs are of * 
he Firſt Perſon, as, ego cœno I ſup, nos cœnãmus we ſup, 

he Second Perſon, as, tu cœnas thou ſuppeſt, vos cœnãtis ye ſap. 
he Third Perſon, as, ille cœnat he ſups, illi cœnant they ſup. 
And * Endings muſt be different to diſtinguiſh one Perſon from the other. 


36 


b. 5. The Conjugating of Verbs, or turning Infinite 


Verbs into Finite, _ 


Q. As befwe o learned to decl'ne a Neun in all its Caſes, ſo a muſt 
what is it then to 
mjugate a Verb? 7 aut 
461. A. To Conjugate a Verb, is to give the right ending of every Per- 


„Da in each Number, of every Tenle, of every Mood. 


AH ſhall that be learned? 
54d A. You — learn now to conjugate 
. Verbs in re 
2. Verbs in; which fignify Imperfectly 


3. Verbs in iſſe "which ſignify Perfectly. 


F. 6. Four Conjugations of Verbs in re. 


Q. Um many ways are Verbs in re declined ? 

463. 4. There are four ways of declining Verbs in re, which are called 
he Four Conjugations ; for | 
are are of the Firſt 
cre are of the Second 
&re are of the Third 
ire are of the Fourth 
. What mark then bath every Conjugation to knw it by 2 
Firſt Conjugation have a long be fore re, as amare. 


Verbs in St | 


% 
145 Second Conjugation have & long before re, as docs re. 
\ the Third Conjugation have & ſhort before re, as legere. + 


Fourth Conjugation have i long before re, as audire 


1 The Firſt Conjugation in are. 


Q. m are Verbs in are declined into Finite? 
465. 4. Verbs in re are declined into the right ending of every,Per- 
dn in each Number, Tenſe, aud Mood, by changing cre into 


I” S329. Po 2:0: -23ks 

„o zs ir P. amus acis ant in the Pref, Imperf. 

n abas abat P. abamus abatis abant in the Pret. Imp. Indicative 

„abo Aabis abit P. abimus abitis abunt;n the Fut. Imp. 

dor to to P.--ate or itore anto inthe Fut. Imperat. 

em és <t P. èmus Eris ent intbe Pref, Imperf. 5 

rem aces arct P. aremus ãtẽtis arent in the Pret. Imp. Sehen ve 

em Es « P. Emus <Etis ent in the Fut. Imp, | 
; N. B. The 


62 _ Declining of Uerbs. Chap. Xv.Mhap. ? 

much... — — | pull 
N, B. The Future of the Subjun#ive is ever the ne with the Pref. Subj 
Q. Give me an Exemple Verbs in are thus varied? 


2. In 
all] 


466. A. Amare to love, which is thus formed. "ny 
1. In the Indicative Mood. 6 nl ty 
Preſ. Tenſe S. amo amis amat P.amamus amicis amant 17 
1 love thou loveſt he loveth we love ye love they love. ot. Im 
Pret. Imp. S. amabam' amabas amable P. amiabamus amãbãtis amãbant 
I d'd love or was a loving, thy didſt, &c. | & das 
Fus. Tenſe S. amabo amabis amabir P. amabimus amibijtis amabunt 
I ſhall love or I will love thy, &c. 
2. In the Imperative Mood. - 
Fut. S. ami or amato amaco P. amare or amatore amanto 
love thou let him love love ye let them leu Q Hh 


N. B. In the Imperative there 1s n) Preſ. nor Pret. becauſe we can bid onl 


for the time to come, and there is no firſt Perſon, becauſe none FINE himſelf 469. 
5 ſaying love I, but Hue thu. 


3. In the Subjunctive Mood, 3 1 
Preſ. S. Si amem ams amet P. amemus amiris ament 8 
if 1 Inve if thu love if he love if we love if ye love if they lh _ 
Pret. Imp. S. Si amarem amares amaret P. amarcmus amareris amaten 5 69g 
| 1 I loved, if I were a . h ving. 5 | 
Fit. S. Si amem ams amkt, Cre. like the Preſ. 19 keg 
if T ſhall N ou | 
$0 decline vicare, crcare, ſormãte, mutare, errire, and al in ire. Roles 
f es 1 
II. The Second Conjugation in ere. rel. S. 
| | 
Q. Hr are Verbs in te turned into Finite 2 5 ret. Im 
467. 4. Verbs in zre are turned into the right endings of every Pet 
fon by changing ere into at. S. 
S. co & tt P. Emus Ctis ent in the Pref. 1 
S. èbam ᷑bas Ebat P. &bamus ebaris èbant in the Pret. Imperf. Indicati. a, 1 
S. ebo ebis ebie - P. Ebimus <biris Thunt in the Fur. — -l 
S. or Eco Eto P. tte or etõte ento in the Fat. of the Imperative ſh e 
S Earn ks kt P. eamus earis cant in the Preſ. 3. 1 
rem ères ret P. Eremus Ercris crent in the Pret. Imp. S Subjunchu “. & 
8. eam eas, like the Pre: in the Fut. 
Q. Give me an Exemple of a Verb in ere thus conjugated ? ret. Im 
468. A. Doctre to teach is formed thus: 90 4 
1. In the Indicative Mood. a 0 - 
Pref. S. döcèko dgces decer P. docemus doc#tis docent Q 4r 
I teach thun teacheſt he teaches we teach ye teach they teac 447 þ 
Pret. Imp. S. doc&bam docebas docebat. P. doceb; mus docẽbãtis doceva Na Þ 


I was a teaching, thu waſt, &c. 
Fat. S. docẽbo doctbis docebir P. erer docẽhitis docẽbunt 
4 will teach, thou wilt, KC, 


rp. XV. Declining of Uerbs.  _ 6; 


—W 2. In the Imperative Mood. > 
4. __—doce or docito docẽto P,——doctte or docẽtote docento. ' 
teach thin let him teach teach ye let ben teach. 
3. In the Subjunctive Mood. 
ref. & Fut. S. ſi doceam doceas doceat P. doceamus doceatis doceant 
It if I teach, &c. 
"we Pret. Imp.S. ut docerem doceresdocerer P. doceremus docererisdocerent. 
dat that I might teach, Kc. 
So decline minere, carcre, Egere, tènéte, habere, and all in re. 


III. The Third Conjugation in ere. 


Hhw are Verbs in &re turned irto their right endings ? 
459. A. Verbs in #re are turned into their right endings of every Per- 
Fa, in every Number, Tenſe, and Mood, by changing zre into 
o is ic P. imus Icis unt in the Preſ. | 
ebam &bis bat P. ẽbamus ẽbatis ẽbant in the Pret. Imp. > Indicative. 


am es tet P. mus Ft is ent in the Fut. 
——E or Ito ito P. ſte or ſtote unto in the Fut Imperat. 
am 5s Ae P. amus iris ant in the Pref. 


am - 3s, Ce. in the Fut. 
Q. Give me an Exemple of a Verb in ere thus conjugated ? 
470: A. Legere to read is fo formed, thus: 
In the Indicative Mood. 
rel. s lego legis legit P. legimvs leglcis legunt 
I do read or I am reading, thou Mm read, &c. 


ret. Imp. S. legebam legebas legebar. p. legebimus legebitis legEbans 


per I read, I did 5 I was a reading, &c. 
at. S. legam jeges leget V. iegẽmus legzris legent. 
Iwill read, I ſhall be a reading. | 
cat 2. In the Imperative Mood. 
| — legs or leglto legito . — legte or legltõte legunto 


tive read tho ſee he read read e ſee tbey read. 
| 3. In the Subjunctive Mcod. 
nch e. & Fut. S. ut legam legas legat P. legamus legitis legant, 


o that I may read, o that th, &c. 
ret. Imp. S. cum legerem cumlegeres cum legerer P. cum legerẽmus, c. 
when I was a reading, when thou waſt, &c. when we read, XC, 
So decline creſcere, agere, gerere, tingEre, and others in cre. 
as Q. Are all Verbs in Ere thus declined in all Perſons ? 
471. 4. No, for there are three Exceptions. 
102" Q. Which is the fu Except ion in the third Conjugat on? 


Eval 472. 4. Except. I. Fer're (far ferere) to bear, in tome Perſons loſes 2 
ter, thus: 

is N. B. And do you tell me what Letter it is, and where, and which Per- 
Ws are right; 5 


2, 
* 


Indic. 


brem Eres Erer P. cremusErEtis Erent in the Pret. Imp. > Subjunckive. 


Geclining ot erbse. Chap. M 


W ud 


WATT F. Fero fer's fert P. ferimus ſer tis terunt, I bear, thou, & 
Indic. 


hap. 

476. 
RL 
Preſ. S. 


pet. Im 


Pret. Imp. S. ferebam-bas-bar P. bamus-bãtis- bant, I bore, thou 
Fut. S. feram feres feret P. feremus feretis ferent, I will bear, A 
Imperat. Fyt.$.---fer'or fer'to fer'to P. fer'te or fer*core ferunto, bear thou & 
Sub Preſ. S. ſi feram ſeras ferat P. feramus feratis feranc, if I bear, & 
Junct. Trex. Inp. S. cum fer*rem-res-ret P. fremus: retis tent * en I bore Xt 
Q. Which is the ſecond Exception in the third Conjugation « "of 
473. 4. Except. II. As fer is ufed for fete, ſo inſtead of dice, dir 
fice, in the Second Perſon Singular of the Imperar. they uſe dic, di 


it. 3. | 


fic, caſting off the &. 2. 
Q. Which is the third Exception ? 9.— 
474. A. Except. III. For volere they uſe velle to. will, to be will ut 

to deſire; and it hath two Compounds. 3. 

c Nolle ( (from non ad velle) to be unwilling, to will, to refuſe, preſ. & 

Malle (rom magis and velle) to be more willing, to have rather, to chuſe. | 

And theſe three are declined wrong 1n four Tenfes, bur in che reſt rig et. In 

wa” 5 

v8Io vis. vult PI. volümus vultis voluf Fo d 
[ Preſ. Iwill thou wilt he will we will ye will hy Q. 4 
| Sing. Ynõlo nonvis nonvult Pl. nojlumus nonvultis nolu 477. 

'Y | Imo mivis mavult I. malümus mavultis maiuY 478. 

= 4 Pret. Q volebam volebas volebat, &c. I was willing mp. Su 

:= } Imp. Anolebam nolebas, &c. 1 was unwilling 479. 

= Sing. malebam malebas, XC. I was rather willing WY 7 

Eur. Svolam voles volet P. volemus voletis volent I ſhall be willy 52 
Sing. Inolam noles, &e. Fu 
'C malam males, &c. mper at 

Impe- c velle and malle have no Imperative. Pub.. 
h. or nolito refuſ? thu, don't thiu. P. nolite or nolitöte don't Ct. 
| [ Pref. Orvelim velis vclit P. velimus velicis velint if I be w'lling, & So dt 

B | 5 g volim nolisnolic P. nolimus nohris nolint Tf I refuſe, Re. N. B. 

24 | malim malis ma!ir P. malĩimus malitis malint if / ſhould che. & Q. T 

= [ Pret.\ veilem velles vellet P. veliemus-eris-ent if I were willing, . yy tel 

In. < nollem nolles et P. emus-etis-ent if I would nt, &c. gur wa 
| 1 i mallem mai.es mallet P.-emus-er1s-enr 10 T had rather, &c 480, 


IV. The Fourth Conjupativh in ire. F ; 


Am are Verbs in ire conjugated into every Perſon 2 
475. A. Verbs in ire ate turned into the x nieht endings of every Pe 
ſon by changing ire into Q. 6 
8.4% is it . imus jtis junt in the Pre/. is oh 

S. iebam jebas iebar P.icbamys iebiris jebant inthe Pret. In. O Indicativ 
8 1am les 1E& P. iemus ietis jent in the Fut. 


$.—1 or ito to F. — ite or jit5re junto in the Fut. Inper. re dec 
S. Jam iis jat P. jamus iatis ſant in the Pre. Po | . fo 4 
S. irem ires fret . jremus iretis irententhePret. Im. > Subjunti. icbai 
$. jam ias iat, &c. as in the Pre. in the Fat. Q . lam 


Q 6i 


Mbap. XV. Declining of Uerbs. 65 
— a — — 
Q. Gwe ne an Exemple of 'a Verb in ire ſo declined? | 
476. A. Audire ) hear is fo declined; thus, 
I. In the Indicative Mood. R N 2215 ji 
Wreſ. S. audio audis audit. P. audimus auditis aud junt 
Ido hear, thou doſt hear, he — we do hear, ye do hear, they d) hear. 
ret. Imp. S. aud iẽ bam audigbas audiẽ bat. P. aud iẽbãmus aud iẽbãtis aud iẽbant 
I heard, I was a hearing, Ne. £48961 | 
t. S. audiam audics audiet P. audiemus audictis aud ient 
I ſhall or will here, thou ſhalt, &c. 
2. In the Imperative Mood. ä | 
b. audi or audito audito P.—-——audite or audithte audinnto 
illi hear thou, let bim hear, hear ye let them bear. 
3. In the Subjunctive Mocd. 
preſ. & Fut. S. fi audiam ſi aud{is fi audiit P. ft aud iãmus - tis · ant 
uſe. - if 1 ſhould hear, if thou ſhouldeft hear, &c. 
righnWret. Imp. 3. cum audirem audires audiret P. audiremus audirctisaudirent 
when I heard, or was a hearing, when thou, &c. th 
vol So decline finire, venire, ſalire, fulcire, farcire, and the reſt in ire. 
u Q. Are all Ferbs of the Fourth Cnjugation thus declined £ 
oli 477. 4. No, there are two Exceptions: for, £4 
nau 478. Except. I, Inſtead of fire they uſe tieri become, which in the Pretet 
mp. Subj. hath ſierem, elſewhere it is declined right, 
479. II. Ire to gs, and quire to be able are in ſome places wrong, thus, 
545 S. eo is it P. Imus itis eunt I go, thou goeſt, he goes, &c. 


ica 


Pret. Imp. S. ibam ibas ibat P. ibamus ibaris ibant I was going, &. 

Fut. S. Ibo ibis ibit P. ibimus ibicis ibunt J will go, &c. 

mperat. S. I or ito Ito P. Elte or ĩtõte eunto go thong &c. 

Pub. 4 Preſ. c Fut. S. ſi eam eas eat P. eãmus eãtis eant if I would go, &c. 
Vw 


„i 


71 


on't act. \_Pret. Imp. S. Item ites iret P. irẽmus irẽtis irene f 1 went, &c. 
, & So decline quire. | | 
Ne. N. B. The Participles are iens, G. euntis, and eundus for iendus. 


Q. Thus you have ſeen the four Conjugations or ways if declinmg Verbs in te, 
ww tell me, are there no Verbs in re but what are declined after one of theſe 
our ways £ | 

480, A. There are twelve Verbs that are of two Conjugations. 


8 i 7. Twelve Verbs partly of the III. and part iy 
of the IV. Conjug ations 


Q. Which are thoſe twelve? | e 
481. 4. Theſe twelve ſictre, jictre, lictre, ſpecere, fodere, ſũgẽre, cl- 


jcatiiſpere, ràpbre, $aptere, cijpere, pircre, quitere, take in an i in moſt places, 
nd ſo are partly of the third Conjugation, and partly of the fourth, and 


re declined thus, by changing ere into 
4 is3 irg3 P. Imus 3 itis 3 junt 4 in the Pref. S 
undi. iebam jébas isbat P. ieèbamus ifbaris ie bant 4 in the Pret. 
lam ies Tec P. iemus 1ctis 1ent 4 in the Fat, ; 


— 


* Gi — 58.— 


Indie atis 


66 ©  etthhiſiig of Uerbs: Chip. xt 


8.—8 or ito 3 Fre #.—=ito of Icõte 3 iunto 4 in the Imperat. K* < 
S. jam jas nat P. iaãmus - fatis fant in the Pref. 2 , arer a 

8 Erem eres Erer P. Tremus Ereris Erent 3 in Fret. Imp. dag . © 
S. tam ias iat P. iamus iatis jant 4 in the Fut. 0 5 Q. 6 

| 85 eee is ferme hs. 83. 
i. In che fndicarive Mood. BACK | a . 

preſ. S. facio facis facit P. facimus facitis ſaciunt reſ. S. 
ue, * thou doeſt, he dove, we do, yedo, they av. 1 


Pret, Imp. S. desen faciebas, Mc. I was doing, thou waßß, Kc, Wret. In 
Fut. S. faciam facies faciet P. tacizmus, c. I will 40, Cc. 


2. In the Imperative Mood. — | ut. S. 2 

$S,—faceer tat or facito facto P faelte or facitore faciunto 4 thou, Cc, 
. In the SubjunAive Mood, 2. 

Pref. Ty Put $. cum faciam facias faciat P. faciãmus, c. when I hall d), &c.,——a 

Pret. Im. S. cum facerem factces tacëret F. facetẽ mus, &c. v hen I was doing, &c. { 


'S1dectinerhe other eleven, aud all their Compounds, and theſe have their 
Participles; in he 8 as Ny) r Oe. and in iendus, faciendus reſ. 


by 8. Four Conjugations of Verbs in i. 


2. Thus bir Verbs in re, now. buy many ways are Verbs in Conjugate ? hh ari. by 
482. 4. There are alſo four Conjugations of Verbs i in ; for, ; 
dri are of the Firſt p, : 
sri are of the Second 
t are of the Third . 
Ciri are of che Fourth | 
Q. What mark is there to know Verbs of one Conjugation from V erbs of an 


Verbs in 


ther? - 
482. 4 ift Conjugation have I long before ri, as amari. 
Verbs of Second Conjugation have & long betore ri, as doceri. 
e Third Conjugation have i not ri, as legi. | 
.,CFourth Conjugation have i long before ri, as audiri, 8 
N. B The Perſons of Verbs in i are formed from thaſe of the Verbs in te, thu. tir 
1. Where chey have e, theſe have or, amo amor amab- o- or. . ẽter 
2, Where they have m, theſe have r, amabam amabar ame- mir. . ear 
3. 8 fe? maus t, ele have tar, amat amatur amant- ur. Q. 6 
| 487. 
I. The Firſt Wegen in ari. 1 
Pref. S. 


Q. How are Verbs in ati made Finite, and turned into the right endings 
484, A, Verbs in ãr i are declined i into the right endings ofevery Perſot 
incach Number, of every Tenſe, and every Mood, by changing ari into 


E 4 2P. 3 b. nine 2:8 4:3 B. ah, S. 
S. or aris orare arur P. amur ammi antur Preſ. = - 

S. dbar abitis or ãbãre ãbãtur P. ãbãmur 3bamini-abantur Pret. Imp. 2. 
S. ador ãbèris or ãbꝭre ãbltur . ãbimur ãbimini ãbuntur H. J 1 


S. — ire or ror ãtor P. amini or aminor antor in Imper., 


, 
N. hap. XV. -  Deelinſagof Uerbs. 659 


er Eris or ere stur P. cmur Emini entur Preſ. 
P. arcrarerisorgrere zrẽtur P. irẽmur Jremini arencur Pret. Imp. O © 
und. N. Er ᷣris or Fre Etur P. èmur mini entur Al. T 


Q. Give me an Exemple of Verb in ri fo declined? | 9 

485. A. Amiri to be loved is fo declined, * a 

1. In the Indicative Mood, | 

reſ. S. ambr amaris or amire am"tur P. amamur amimyni amantur 1 

I am loved, thu art loved, he is loved, we are—ye —— they are loved 

| Pre. Inp. S. amib- Ar-aris or ãre-atur P.-amur amini- anrur | 1 
I was loved, th waft loved, &c. | Hh 

vt. S. amib dr Eris or -ere-jrur P. Imur Imini-untur i 

Cc, I ſhall be loved, tho ſhalt, &c, — | i? 
2. In the imperative Mood. | | 


, &c.,——amare or amator amitor P. —amãmini or amiminor amant6r if 
Mot be thou loved, let hm be loved, be ye loved, let them be loved. 1 
their 3. In the Subjunttive Mood. | to 
dus reſ. & Fut. S. ſi amer ameris or amere amẽtur P. amẽmur amẽ mini amentor 


If I be loved, if thou, &c. 
ret. Imp. S. cum amir-cr Eris or ere &rur P. emur-emini -entur 
when I was loved, when thou, &c. | 
So decline creari, tormart, damnari and all Paſſives in iri. And Deponents 
ec? Piri, but engliſh them Actively, as venari t) bunt, conãti to endeavour, &c. 


IT. The Second Conjugation in eri. 


Q. Ww are Verbs in eri Conjugated aright ? 
a 486. 4. Verbsin #ri are turned into their right endings of each Perſon 
us, by changing eri into 
Edt eris orcre crur P. emur @Gmini entur in the preſ. I 
.&bar ẽbãr is or bare ẽbãtur P. ẽbãmur ẽbãmini ẽbãntur Pres, Imp. 
ebör ebEris or ẽbre ẽbitur P. ebjmur èblmini Ebuntur in the Fut. 
-—— &re or ẽtor tor P. mini or minor èntor in the — - 3M 
thu. eur Cris or eãre eatur P. eã nur eãmini eantur in the Preſ,;; 
yas ereris or rere Erctur P ercmur Eremini crentur Pret. Imp. £ 
ear earis or. care lite the Prep. | in the Fut. I 
Q. Give me an Eremple of a Verb in @ri ſo declined ? 
487. A. Doceri fo be taught, is fo conjugated; as thus, 
In the Indicative Mood. 
ref. 5. dõcðr doceris or docere docttur P. docemur decẽmini docenrur 
I am taugbt, i. e. now a teaching, thou art, &c. 
ret. Imp. S. doctd ar-aris or · are. ãtut ' P.-amur- amini -ancur 
I was taught, or a teaching, thou waſt a teaching, &&. 
t. S. doceb or -Eris er Ere-irur P. Imur - Imini -unrur 
- 1 fhall be taught, thou ſhalt, &c. 
2, In the Imperative Mood. 
p. docëre or docẽtor docẽtor F. —docemini or dockinſnor docentor 
be thou Fanght, let him be "ay be ye taught, let #hem * 
| : ; 


an 


v 
6 
S. d 


58 Declining of Gerbe. Chap. XV 


In the Subjunctive Mood. $1245 5 19 3 
Pref. nit. S. ut doct- arsãris or are e tun P. mur ãmini - antur 
| that 1 may be taught, that thou, Ge 914 v9 
Pret: tmp, §. cum docẽrer cum. docereris or docerere cum doctrerur, Ce. 
while I was à teaching. while thou wert, &c. i.e. in being taught. 
So decline tenẽri, habẽri, monèri, and ot her Paſſives in eri, and ſo engliſh 


them. And Deponents in eri, but engliſh them Wel vereri to dread 
tueri to behold, reri to think, &c. 


III. The Third Conjugation in i. 4 
Q. H are Verbs in i of the Third Conjugation declined * e 


488. 4. Verbs in i of the Third Conjugation are turned into their righ 2&3 
Perſons by changing i into 


„ iar- 
„ Irer 


S. or... Fris or cre_ Itur P. imur imini untur in the Pre. Q S. - 

S. ebar ebaris or @bire ebirur _ P. Tbamur @bamini cbantur Pret Im. JW 
S.ar eris or cre etur P. mur émini entur in he Fut. QC Q Gi 
S. —<Ere or itor itor P.--Im'nl or iminor untur in the Imperat 47 1 by 
S. at aris or are irur P. amur amiai antur in the Preſ. 1 1 
S. Erer ErEris or Ercre. r tur P. Eremur Eremini Erentur Pref. Imp. F 
S. ar aris orare aur . P.amur ämini antut in the Fut. OA . 

Q. Give me an Greinple Fa Verb in i ſo declined ? 3 
48 4 A, Legi to be read, is ſo conjugated, as thus: it, S. a 
In the Indicative Mood. I 
Pre.. s. legor legeris er legere legitur P. legimur legimini leguntur 2, l 
Jam read, or I am nw a reading, hu art, &c. tt 
Pret. Imp. S. legebar legebaris or legebare legebarur P. legebamur, . by 
I was read or I was a reading, i. e. in being read. 3. 1 


Fut. S. legar legeris or legere legẽtur P. legẽmur legemin! legentur Nyeſ. 
I ſhall be read, thu ſhilt, &c. 

2. In the Imperative Mood. 
$,———epgere or legitor leghror P. legimini or lepiminor leguntor 
be thou read, let him be read, beye read, let them be re 

3. In the Sub junctive Mood. 

Preſ. Fat. S. ſrlegarlegiris or jegãre legitur P. legamur legamini legantiſ@sjn &. 

le read, if thou beeſt, &c. Q. Art 

Pret. Imp. S. cum legèrer legereris or legèrẽre legererur P. legeremur, (5 494. 4 
when I was read or a reading, i. e. in being read. | 


90 dec 
englif 


So decline emi, vendi, agi, fundi, and all Paſſives in i. Fi 
490. And ſo decline the Deponents in i, but engliſh them AQtvely, i 
Fungi to diſcharge, frui to enjoy, uti to uſe, Ne. Q. Wh 
Q. Are all Verbs in i of the Third Conjugation thus declined : 3 495. 4 
491. 4. There is one verb ferri to be born, that loſes a Letter in ſonff'* 12 
ann as, me pl 
Preſ. S. ſeror or fer ris ſer're ſer tur P. ferimur farimini feruntuf hy 4 « 

: Pret. Imp. S. ferẽbãr ferebaris or ſerẽbãre ferẽbãtur, Ge. na 
Fut. S. ferar ferẽris or ferere ferẽtur P. ſerẽmur, Cc, 1 


In. Fur. Sierre or fer tor ſer tor h. ſerimini or feriminor feruntaſi 5,” © 


Subj, Pref. & Fut. S. ſi ſerar ferris or ſerare feratur P. ſerãmur, Cc. beer 


ap XV. Declining or Werbg. 22: i 


** „* 


Subj. Pret. Imp. 8. 1 fer'r rer fer? reris or-fet*re rere fer' derer, Ge. 0 


MS," I The Fourth Conjubiition' in iri. . 


Vim are Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation in ri declined? | 
492. 4. Verbs in 7ri are turned into the right endings of every Perſon 
by changing 7ri into 
. for iris ... or ire , Itur P. Tmur imini juntur in Preſ. 
P. iEbar iebaris or iebare jẽbãtur P. i5bimur -mint - -mur in Pret. 
. iar 1eris or 15re jerur P. J*mur 1emini iencur in Ft, 
— ire or jtor ĩtor P. —imini or iminor iuntor 7 the Aer 
. iar jaris or jate jatur P,1amur jamini iantur in Pref.” 
. irer iréris or ĩtẽte iretur P. irẽmur irẽmini ĩrentur Pr, Imp. > S. 
iar 1aris, Cc. 10 Eo Fut. * 
ive me an Exemple of a Verb in iri iſ declined ? | 
493. A. Audiri to be heard, is ſo formed, as thus: 
7. In the Indicative Mood. 


Ld 


*4w91pU] 


reſ. S. audior audiris or audire auditur P. audimur audimtai audiuntur 


C1 
0 Ian beard, thou art heard, he is beard, we are ye are they are— 
ret, Imp. S. audicbar-zris or -are-arur P,-amur-imini-ancur 
: I was heard, i. e. in being heard, thou waſt heard, &c. 
it. S. audiar audizris or -e audierur P. audicmur audicmini audientur. 
| I ſhall be heard, thou ſhalt, &c. 
tur 2. In the Imperative Mood. 83 
,——audire or auditor auditor P. audimini or audiminor aud iuntor 
„ G. be thou heard, let him, &c. 3 | 
3. In the SubjunRive Mood. 
Ir Wreſ. & Fr. . 11 audiar audiaris or audiire audiatur P. audiamur, Cre. 
if I be heard, if thou, & c. 
Net. Imp. S. ſi audirer audireris or aud ĩrere auditẽtur, Gr. 
ator if I were heard, &c. 


e rei So decline finiri, puniri, hauriri, and all Paſſives in iri; and Deponents,, 


engliſh them Actively, as metiri to meaſure, mentiri fo He, ordiri to 
ganiW-in, &c. 


Q. Are all Verbs in 1 declined after theſe four Comjugations : ? 
a, ON 494. 4. No, for there are two ſorts that are of two Conjugations, 


Fifteen Verbs ini partly of the Third and partly of the Hurt. 


Q. Which is the firſt ſort? 
495. A. There are 15 Verbs in i, grädi, mori, päti, and the Paſſives of 


in ſon pe 12 ſet down num. 481. that ſhould be of the Third Conjugation, but 
me places take in an i and are of the Fourth, thus, 


ely, | 


-untur ior 4 Eris or Fre 3 frur P. Imur 3 Imini 3 juntur 441 Pr0C# © 
A ifbar idbiiris or iebice iẽbatur P. itbamur itbamini iẽbantur 4 Pree, & 2 
lar iris or ire ictur P. iẽmur, Cc. in the fut. J & 

runto e ere or ior Itor - .— imlni or iminor 3 luntor 4 in Imper, 
ray ar 1aris or 1are 1itur P. iamur, gc. 4 in the Preſ. 1 © 
8 cer Ereris or Ercre crerur P. eremur, Cc. 3 in the Fut. Q 


E 3 N. B, And 


— 


6 N T 
4 - 4 - A's ras math gn * * 91 * ——— — 
2 — — —— —2 n i Re 2 
Safes xo WF a6 27 Þ + 8 CRE 4 2 : 
— 
* * * 


. —— 


1 - „ ** W rai 
5 8 * G "IE" "_ wa 0 - — 
=. 5 I WES So _ Ds * D * * 2 2. : <P e 2 
BD OO eo ET IE Frere hf age 3-7 bs 2 — otnh 
. Rt 2D Eo 2 4 e p | * £ 7 Ss 2 p 
\ 1 wi $ , ne] r bes 9 el * « 
8 0 
— a4 + 4 
8 


> 


have done. 


Chap. XV. 


70 _.., Declining of Verbs: 


N. B. AI make their Participles/in iens and iendus 4 46 gradiend 
going, moriens dying, capiendus to be taken, &c. " 
ieh ie leren fort fin) 0 {aL NS 

496. A. Oriri and pðtiri ſhould be of the fourth Conjugation only, but 
they are declined partly in the third, and partly in the fourth, as thoſe before, 
orior ortr is or orere, oritur, potꝭrer poterẽris, Ce. 34 


* 


8 §. 9. The Dedlining of Ve erbs in iſſe. 


Q. Having Cnjugated Verbs in te and i, that ſignify Imperfectly, nn 
tell how Verbs in iſſe that ſigniſy Perfectly are Conjugated? 

497. A. Infinite Verbs in iſe are made FTnue thewy changing 7ſſe int 
S. 1 iſti jr P. imus iſſis sunt g ere N Pret. Perf. > > 
S. EramEras ᷑rat P. &ramuMAracis.erant int ter plupe f. S 
S. łro Eris Ftit P. &rimus Ftitis Strint. Ar in 20 Fut. Perf. Y; 

N. B. Verbs in iſſe ha ve no Imperative; for you cat egi and à thing i 


| 3 © EF" | 2 : 

S. rim ris. krit P. Aimas {kts FRE the Pret. Perf. ) 

S. iſsém ifses iſſet P. iſsẽmus Tees —rtffit in the Preterpluper. 

S. Ero Eris Eric p. &rĩmũs | Erjtis Erint in the Fut. Perf. 
N. B. The Fut. Perf. Subj. is the ſame with the Fur. Perf. Indic. 
Q Give me an Exemple of a Verb in iffe jo declined ? 

498. A. Legiſſe to have read, is ſo declined, as thus: 

1. In the Indicative. _ — | | 
Pret. Perf. S. lagi ligiſti dex AHR imus légiſtis legerunt or legere 
Th Ore hf ee KC. | | 
Preterpluperf, S8 = 1 2 RRS 


Fut. Perf. . legs 
1 
2. In the pe Hue | 
Pret. Perf. S. Mlegkrim legeris _ 
1 ; ; 8 


P. leger ãmus ãtis- ant 
ad, &c. 

. legerimus legericis legerint 
e read, 8c. 


"*7 
" + 


4 2 * P 2 ; 
<6] 0 1 ae OP 
, e 10 K A 5 AF 


U 
X legerimus legèrltis legerint 


if Nate ge e eee 
Preterpluper f. S. cutegifiemepW-exfer P. ẽmus· ẽtis ent 
when 1 had read, when thou, &c. | ; 
Fut. Perf. S. cum legero legèris legerir P. leger - ĩimus. ĩtis· int 
when I ſhall have read and done it, when thou, &c. 
Soc decline amaviſſe amavi amaviiti, c. amaver am- as at, Ce. | 
docuiſſe docui docuiſti, c. docueram, Cc. docuero, &c. docuerim, 
audiv-ifſe-i-iſtj, Cc. Stam, Cc. Ero, Cc. -Erim, c. iſſem, Oc. 
and all Verbs Infinite in iſſe. 1 
499. N. B, Cœpiſſe, odiſſe, and meminiſſe baving no Imperfects, - 
only declined thus; but memento remember thou, and mementõte emen 
ye, are uſed in the Imperative. 


i 


Pret. 


$9 1 
And 1 
N. 
exami 
Per [or 
bim p. 


XV. 


lien 


but 


efare, 


ge te 
ant 


erint 


erint 


ON: XVI. 


and Phra es. 71 


\ The Declini ng E le and: ede 


"ry 05 we nom her with Conjugating Verb; and learned 1 a 

So. 4. There remains yet one Verb eſſe and s Compounds, poteſſe or 
poſſe (from potis able aud clic. to be,) &c. which are We in a and 
by themſelves, thus; 


From effe to be, and poſſe to be able, are formed | 


In the Indicative Mood. | 5 1 
reſ 5 Sum es eſt P. sümus ellis font 
Tam bo art he i we are ye are they are. 


So poſſum ports poteſt F. poſeumus poteſtis poſſunt 7 am ble, &c. 
Pret. Imp. S. eram | eras Erat P. eramus _ Eracis, erant 
I was fh waſt he was we were ye were they were 

Sy potEram potkras potèrat P. potEramus, rc. I was able, &c. 

Fut. S, Ero. Friss Fkrit P. Etimus Feltis Frunt 
I ſhall be thou — he we ſhall be de — they [ball be 
So potèro poreris potèrit P. porer-imus-icis-unt, I ſhall be able, &c. 
2. In the Imperative Mood. ; 
9c or eſto eſto - 5. eſte or eſtote ſunto 
be thin let him le be je let them be. 

N. B. Poſſe hath no Imperat. for we don ” to bid one be able. 

5. In the Subjunctive Mood. | 
Pref. Fut. S. fifim ſi sis ſi sit 
FI maybe, if thou, &c. 

So ſi poſſ-im. is. it P.--Imus-Itis-int if I be able, Sce. 

Pret. Imp. ſi eſſem ſi eſſẽs fi eſſet P. ſi eſs mus f. elostis ſi eſſent⸗ 
if I were if thou wert, &c. 

Sy ſi poſſem poſsẽs poſſet P pof⸗ e mus poſ:ẽtis poſſent, if [ were able, &c. 
And thus you have learned to decline all declinable Words. 

N. B. In theſe things the Learner muſt be ſo long exerciſed by daily pepetitions, 
examination, &c. till he can withut he ſi tation give any Word in an Caſe, 
Perſon, Tenſe, &c. that you ſhall call for in an huydred inſtances, and then let 
bim Proceed to Sentences, and he will preſently di them 1 alt uiratian. 


P. ſi simus {i $ oicis fi fiat 


e P. XVI. 
Of Sentences and Phraſes. 


Q. OW that you have learned the eight ſorts of Words, ard { bow to deeline 
Nouns, Pronouns, Verbs and Participics, tell me what is tobe dne 
with theſe Words? 
501. 4. The uſe of Words is to make Sayings or Sentences. 
Q. What is 4 Saying or Sentence? | 


he that hears it can underſtand our mind thereby. 
Hm mim Words go to the making of a Sen ence? 
N 4 1. Sometime one Word makes a Sentence, 45 Ah! Alas! Fi ie! 
% E 4 


502. A. A Sentence is ſo many Words as expreſs our meaning ſo, that 


2. Some- 


= * 4 
„„ K aw 


n 


PIX 


—ö8— ſ— 


2. Sometimes #wo; as, Maſters teach. Boys learn. Time haſtens, 
3. Some Sentences are made of three Words; 4c, Life is ſhort, Death will come, 
4. Some of four ; as Goodneſs alone giveth Honour. Dil gence makes the Scholar 
_ Good Children are dutiful. 2 Hoang aan ks * 


5. Sometimes five Words make a Sentence; as, 7dleneſs keeps fools infÞ 510. 
Iglo ance. Bad Teachers make bad Scholar. D Fathe 


Q. If there be but one Word in a Saying, what Word is that ? Py 
504. 4 It there be but one Word in a Sentence, it is an Interje ion, for The 


6. Sometimes ſix, ſomerimes ſeven, ſometimes eight, ſometimes nine, Ce. Q. * 


no other Word but i can alone expreſs the meaning of ones mind. Q 6 
Thus, when we would expreſs that we © 512. 
would have one attend, we ſay O! or Eho! or Heus! / Ho! Soho! filia! 
would have one come to ut, we ſay, Ehodum! of Heus! Soho 7 ) anim 
would have a thing taken out of our ſight, we ſay, Apage: Out / away! Q. U 
would have ſilence made, we ſay St! or au! Whift / Huſh! peace! 513. 
would ſhew ſomething to be obſerve, we ſay En! or Ecce! Lo? Behold ! Firſt ut 
are ſurprixed with wonder, we ſay vah! or Papz! Strange? Heigh? Pen p 
account an aff bravely done, we ſay Eu! Evge! or Evax! O brave Well ! Q 
account it mean and ſlight it, we [ay Hui! or Vah! or Phy! Hie Piſh! $14. 
are deeply affedled, weſayO! O! or Ah! Ah! © * 0 
account the caſe pitzous, we ſay Hei! or Heu! er Ehen! Ah! Alas! Alack !. 0 
denounce woe to any, we ſay Hei! or Ve! ee Wailaday ! »JO 
505. N. B. So that to expreſs any thought that may be expreſſed by only an H 
Interjettion, you may uſe an Interjeion alone. N. B 
Q. What 9 there be more Words than one, hom muſt they be put together to 1 
make Sentences? © nyt + | nt 8 
506. A. Every Word is to be joined to ſome other Word in the Sen- I 0 
tence, and to be rightly joined; and theſe two Words are called a Phra, 90 
QQ What then is a Phraſe? | 3<0 
$07. A. A Phraſe is two Words pur rightly together towards making PE 0 
a Sentence, as the beſt Speakers have uſed to do; as, (0 
Jam, thou art, he is, net art, thou is, he am. 
J love, thou loveſt, he loveth, nor I loverh, thou love, he loveſt, Ce. 0 
Q. How may a Learner Snow how to put Words rightly together as they did? J© 


$08. A. To teach you that, here ſhall along be ſer down 


| I. Exemples ſhowing how the beſt Speakers put words together. 
1 II. Rules directing you to imitate them. 


II. Exerciſes for your imitation of thoſe Exemples by the direction of 
theſe Rules. 


N. B. And theſe three ſhall be full, plain and ea(y, and in the natural orders 
ſo that you ſhall be taught the firſt mation in (peaking firſt, and the ſecond ſe 
cond, and the third third, c. and your way ſhall be made ſo clear, aud you 
_ direftions ſo true, and all impediments ſo removed, that you cannot fa.l tofÞ A 


make any Sentence right, if you will take heed. 


IV. D. 5. III. 


2 


22 2 2206 60 


| 215 

Q. How many ſuch motions are to be made fer making any Sentence ? thou {6 
509. A. There are to be made XIII. Mol jons, which will make XII, Q. 
hraſes. | 5 | : 516 
Hhlaſes. $16 

| 2 6 000#, 


| L 1. The 


XV, hop. XVI. _ OE The 1, 1 1 


bs, os 6: 5 
= Sh we 71 8. 1. The rt Phufe, N 
ar, — 


. a Which is the firſt motion towards making a Sentence? * 
o in $10: A. The firſt ſtep is to call on that ching Anek we e to, 4 
I Father! O Maſter ! Soho Thomas | 
„ Cc. Q. Which are the two Words to be put together i in this frft Phrafe : 8 
511. 4. The . is an Interjection of calling, as O, eho, heus. 
n, ſor The a. is a Subſtantive of the Vocative Cate, as Pater ! Domine! = 
Q. Give me ſome Exerples how the Latins . to put theſe together + ? 


512. A. As, | 
) filia! 0 dauzhter. 4 Eho Adime! Soho Adam ! Heus pater! Ho father 1 
) anima! O ſoul/ lo pũer! Oh 8390 Heus mater! Ho mot her! 


455 Q. What is the RULE to direct us to make the like? 

513. 4. Whenſoever any thing is to be called un, 
4 Firſt uſe an Interjection of calling. O! Io! Eho! Heus ! 
„„ When pur to it the Name of the Thing called upon in the Vocative Cafe.” 
ell! Q. Which are the Exerciſes for Imitation of this Phraſe ? | 


h / | 514. A. \ 
Co Anna! O Mary! E Io ſilvæ! 9 ſtars . 
> '.Þ YO Catharina: 0 Barbary / | ,- JO. domina! O Churches! 
O Elizabetha! O Foan/ A JO femiaz! 7 Queens / 
ly an Heus Thoma! O Luke / — CHeus ancillz ! Ho girls / 
"ea I 8 The Latin Exemples are to be turned into Engiſh, and the Engliſh 
nto Latin. 
gen I (O Abrahame! O Benjamin | = CO Angeli! O lords 
he ofo > \O Henrice! O James! &= \Ocoqui! 0 boys/ 
0 Paule! O Peter 0 viri! O prieſts 7 
king O'Georgi ! O Son / S O filii! O minds 
O puer! O prie / 18 /O magiſtri! O ſervitars { 
(o cœlum! O teme! g Opalatia! O kingdoms ! 
oc. | CO Daniel! O Samuel! CO partes! O O mothers! 
dia? JO fol! O man. 5 JO ſorores ! O brothers ! 
O latro! O thief . O cives O Kings / 
; CO judex! O leader / 2 CO woes ! Oſfoldiers/! 
O ſpiritus! 8 CO ſpirits / C0 net O faces / 
a of O domus! Q <O houſes! ! 80 res! g LFObthings/ 
O magiſtracus ! O magiſtrates ! | = 20 dies! < O days 


N. B. And this is the only ue of the Voc. Cale, to denote the thing called. 


order 

id ſe 

d your 8. 2. The Setond Phaſe. 

41 U Q Having called on the thing to hear us, what 7s next to be done? 


515. A. The next ſtep is to tell what thing is, doet, or is done, as, I am, 
thou {oveſt, 4 book is read. 
Q. What are the two Words in the ſecond Phraſe 2 


XII 


| o book, | 
The The 


516. 4. The firſt Word 1s « vubltanuye ot the Nom, Cale, as 3 thou, | 


4 1 Sententeg The Second Phzaſe- 


= a. ME. < 


Chap. AVI 


Ihe Sccöbnd is a Verb finite, as Am, Loveft, I. rad. 


Q. How may I certainly knw which Word is to be the Nominative Caſe 
$37, 4. Firſt find outtheVetb Finite, and then ask who is? who does! 

or who ſuffers ? or what is? what does? or whit ſuffers? and the Word that 
Ss is always of the Nominative Caſe," as Tam, who is? J, thar's the 
in Thou loveft, who loves? than, chats the N. C. in the Book j 2s read 


E57 is read? The book, that's the Nom. Cafe. 


Q. Grue me ſome Exemples how the Latins 60 fo at theſe Het her? 
Sing. 1. Ego ſum I am ] Ego amo I love' Ego amor 1 am loved 
2. Twes th art © Tu amas thou love ſt | Tu amiris thor art lov; 

3. Puer eft tbe boy 3s Puet amat the boy tov.” "Per amiturthe Foy ig I 
Nos ammaur we are love 
Vos amamini ye axe love 
pueri ve "aries 507 are Ii 

7 Why is the Verb to every Nominative Caſe changed ſo? 

$18, A. Becauſe of whatever Number or Perſon the Nom. Caſe is, ſti 
the Verb muſt be put into the ſame to agree with it, ſo that 

of the Sing. Number, the Verb muſt be of rhe Sing. Number too. 

of the Plur. Number, the Verb muſt be of rhe Plur. Number too. 
< of the firſt Perſon, the Verb muſt be of che firſt Perſon too. 

of the /econd Perfon, the Verb muſt be of the ſecond Perſon too. 

of rhe third Perfon, che Verb mult be of the (bird Perſon too. 
N. B. 4 4 Ego is th? Nominative of the firſt Per ſon Singular. 
Betts is the Nominative of the firſt Perſon Plural. 


Plur. 1. Nos ſumus we are | Nos amamus we love 
2. Vos eſtis ye are | Vos amaris ye love 
3. Puer i ſunt ho are | Pucri amant boys love 


£ 


* the N. be] 


Tu ig the Nominative of the ſecond Perſon & ngular. 
Vos is the Nominative of the ſecond Perſon Plural, 
All other Nom. Caſes when (po-Y Singular if one bs meant, 
4 he P Plural i if more than one. 


n of, are of the third Perjon d 
Q. Now give me the RULE of the ſecond Phraſe : 2 


819. 4. When one is to ſhew that ſome! hing is, does, or is done. 

1. Put down the Word for that thing in the Nominative Caſe. 

And, 2. Put to it the Verb Finite in the ſame Number and in the ſame Per! 
r A Verb Perſonal agreeth wich its Nominative Caſe in Number and Pei 
Q. Which are the Exerciſes in Imitation of the Second « FEES 


520. A. 


L Exemples of Verbs ſignifying Imperfectly. 


And, 1. In the firſt Conjugation in ares 


In the Preſent Tenſe Indicative. 


Ego ſto I walk -. Ego regno 
Tu cubas _ Thou ſlandeſ} Tu jentas 
Avis volat The bullock lieth | Coquus cœnat 


Nos ambulamus We ſwim 
Vos pugnatis Tie flee | 
"Piſces nant Bears fight 


Nos-clamamus 
Vos latratis 
Agni balant 


Thou ſuppeſt _ 
The King reigns 


Dogs bark 


Falmon 
N. B 
Double 


52 
Ego de 
Tu vid 
puer p 


Ego pr 


Ju mo 


Fur pe 


Ego ſe 
Ta dot 
Pulex 1 


hap. XVI. Sentented. The Second: Mbraſe⸗ 
ͤ a EE 


In the Prater-Imp. Indicat. ; of In the Fur. Ind icat. 

Irgo ſtabam | 7 was walling | Ego jentado I will fight.” 

1 th Ys volabas Thu waſt Ranking Tu pugna bis Phon wilt Gon... 
th Taurus cubabat The owl was flying | Thomas peccabir George ſhall break. 
Nos balabamus We were lying Nos regaabfwus Ve will. cry out 


ab. Vos nabaris Te bleated (1 ing | Vos clamabitis Te will thunder 
2 Virb eee Whales were ſwim- | Nabes Tn: Ling alk . 
ved 4 5 In the Imperative Mood. 

(oven bite" Tie bo. Tu tary ht” 3. Fight thiu 

is [1 YAnas volato Let the Prot? ſwim Miles pugnato” Let the coach ſt and 
vel Vos cubate Vall ye | Vos crepatote Reignjee 
lie Salmones nanto Let dicks gie | Reges regnanto Let öladdert eracł 


are N. B. Exemples of the Subjunctive Mood yu ſhall have in the Nr el of 
Double Sentences, to which they belong. 


53 ſt] 

1 521. Exemples of the Second Conjugation in ere. 

00. In the Preſent Indicative. wt 
Igo dos I dine Nos ridemus e teach 

0. Flu vides Thu biteſt Vos ſedetis Tie ſee * 

. puer prandet Peter laughs Pucri flent Girls langh 


In the Przt-imperfe@ Indicative.” 
Ego prandebam I was ſitting Nos lugebamus We were laughing 
Tu mordebas' Thou waſt weeping Vos mulgebatis Te were (pining 
Fur pendebat The man was dining i Puellæ nebant Thieves were banging 
In the Furure Indicative, 
Ego ſedebo I ſhall jee Nos nebimus e will teach 


Tu docebis Thu wilt milk Vos mulgebitis Te will ſpjn 
Pulex mordebir The wom will mourn \ Viri prandebunt Men wilt fit 
> Perf In the Imperative Mood, 
| Perf Tu doce Langh thou Vos ſedere Teach ye 


rucr gs Let the flea bite, | Pueliz lugento Let the birds ſee 


522. Exemples of the Third Conjug. in ere. 


In the Preſent Inditive. In the Præter- Imp. Indicat. 
Ego curro I go Ego ludebam I was roaring 
Tu vadis  Thuurunneſt | Tu currebas Thou waſt ſinging 
Mare fremir A river flows Rivus fluebat The wilt was playing 


Nos gemimus e fal. Nos vivebamus We were running 

Vos caditis Tie groan Vos canebatis Te were living 

Rivi fluunt Seas roar Arbores creſcebantTurtles werggrown 
Ll In the Future of the Imp. Indicat. 

Ego vadam I (ball play Nos cademus We ſhall grow 

Tu curres Ton ſhalt fall Vos ludetis Te (hall go 

Anguis ſer pet A river ſhall um | Amnes fluent Snakes ſoall wriggle 


| In 


77 


7 Sinetitees. — Pbꝛale- Chap. Xv1{bap-23 
— 
In the Imperative. ty 
Ta freme Play ton Vos vaditote Roar e 520 
Gramen creſcito Let the wave ned Undz fluunto Les cats run 0 in 
| n the 


go leg 
Tu vend 


523. Exemples of the Fourth Conjugation." 


Tn the Preſent of the Imp. Indie. In the Prat · Imperfect. IndicarÞ'c2 em 
Ego venio Tprate |, Ego ſaliẽbam I was grunting Nes duc 
Tu E Thou muttereſt Tu dormiebas Tho waſt raving Nos vol 


Hirundo garriebat The bear was mu urrus t 
Nos mutiebamus We were dancing 


| 


Agna ſalit The mole ſleeps 
Nos garrimus We go: 


Vos mutĩtis Te come Vos rugiebatis Te were ſleepins | | .' 
Talpæ dormiunt Lambs leap Porci grunnie bant Men were Wating - 
In the Future of the Imp. Indic. go aud 
Ego grunniam I will roar In the Imperative Mood. u punĩ 
Tu rugies . . Thouwilt grunt | Tu muti Go thou abula f 
Vacca mugier An Horſe will = Sas grunnito Let Sam. come Nos ſen 
Nos mutiemus We will prate Vos garrite Sleep ye os feri 


Vos garriétis Te will mutter 


| Vituli mugiunto Let bubbles dance 
Equi e - Cows will low 


'ulnera 


$24. . II. Exemples of the Firſt Conjug! in ati. | 4 


In the Preſent Indic. of the Imp. In the Præt- Imp. Ind icat. 5 
o amor I im lied Ego damnibar I was approved ln th 
Tu laudaris Thou art loved | Tu probabiris Thou waſt loved go am 


Fraus damnatur A letter js formed { Sermo laudabitur The book was form N erra 
Nos probamur We are tamed Nos amabamur We were famed [inca n 
Vos domamini Tie are praiſed Vos domabamini Te were condemned Nos cla 
Lirerz formantur Cheats are cadzn'd | Libri formabanrur$Speech's were prai-$'0s lati 

In the Future of the Imp. Indic, (/edPerdice 


Ego laudabor TI will be loved In the Imperative Mood. 

Tu, probabèris Thaw'lt be praiſed | Tu laudare Be thou condemned 

idõlum damnabitur 4 ward will be for. | Regina amator Let the Kingd in 

Nos domabimur We'll be approved be tamed © 

Vos amabimini Te will be tamed | Vos probamini Be ye pratſed . [89 Cri 

Verba formabuntur 1d9/s will be rond. Regna Gomantor Let Queens be [ceo nev 
Et et Samuel 


525. Excmples of the Second Conjug. in eri. 


In the Preſent Imp. Indic. In the Future Indicative 
Ego doceor I am held Ego mordẽbor I ſhall be affrigbtel In tk 
Tu teneris Thou art moved | Tu terrebꝭris Tho ſhalt be bitten ES iv 
Sol moverur The mn is affi izhted | Penna renebſrur A rout ſhall be taught N u * 


Nos fovemur We are bitten | Nos fovebimur We ſhall be moved FB g 
Vos mordemini Je are cheriſhed j Vos movebimini Te ſhall be cheriſhed Ns m 


Animalia terrentur Boys are Fanght Turbæ docebuntur Pens ſhall be held 95 ga 
res 


FE. 
1 4 


$26, Ex- 


rap. el Sentetices- The Second Phae. 


—— *** 1 


— — — — 
2 „* 


: 


526. Exemples of "the Third Conjugation i in i. 


In che Preſent of the Imp. Indic. In the bræter- Imp. Indicative; 


go legor J am ſold Ego emẽ bar I was rouled M 
ſu vendèris Dou art bought. © Fu vendẽbaris Thou waſt led - 10 
licat Hrca emitur A boat ig read + | Verbum legẽbãtur A coach was drawn 1 | 


os ducimur We are drawn 
TH volvimini Te are led 
m Turrũs trahuntur WheeP's are roul'd 


Nos trahebamur We were bougbe —_ 
Vos ducebimini Te were fold .. 
Globi volvebantur Words were read 


; # 
$44 — Ren — ny * - 
$3 bf * — « x {ALS 90G 8 
1 — I” 7 3 8 
* a 2 S — 


cing | F 
hz 11 a0 x hpi.” | 57 750 Ry 7 i 
. 527. Exemples of the Fourth Conjug. in iti. 

go audior I am puniſhed Ego vinciebar I was ſtricken 

u puniris Thou art ſtricken | Tu feriebãris Thou waſt bound 
| abula finirur A wound 1s bound | Corpus puniebatur 4 ftripe was felt 
ze Nos ſemtimur We are heard Nos audiebamur We were ended 

os ferimini Te are ſenſed Vos finiebamini Te were beard 
tance ulnera vinciuntur Tales are ended Verbera ſentichanmurBeeres were puns, 


0 438; Kadivle of Verbs ft ignifying Perfectly. 


1. Verbs in aviſſe. 


ed In the Prater-Perſett. Indicar. In the Przter- pluperf, Indicat. 
bel go ambulavi I have barked | Ego naveram I bad walked 
form Ta erraviſti Thou haſt. bawled | Tu ambulaveras Thou Hadſt flown 
4 Tinca navit Apart. hath flown | Turtur erraverat The dog bad hoid 
nel Nos cla mavimus We have walked | Nos volaveramus We had bawled 

pr ai-$'9s latraviſtis Te have ftrayed | Vos clamaveratis Te had ſwim 
(elferdices volayeruntTench have ſwum | Canes ululaverant Turtles bad ſtra d 
mned | 329. 2. In eviſſe. 


In the Prate-perf. Indicat. 

Ego crevi I have weft 1 Nos nevimus ie have grown 
Tu neviſti Thou haſt grown | Vos fleviſtis 2 have ſpun 
Samuel flevit The girl hath ſpun | Fontes creyerunt Eyes have webs 


$30. In wille. 


Yet In the Præter-perf. Indicat. In the Prater · pluperf. Indicar: 
tten Ego ivi I have muttered ] Egogrunniveram I had gone 

gb: Ta dormiviſti Thou haſt prated | Tn hinniveras Thou hadſt mutter d 
ved (nvs grunnivit An ear hath heard Ov is iverat A aſs had roared. 
iſhed Nos mutivimus We have gone Nos mutiveramus We had grunted 
held Nos garriviſtis Te have ſlept | Vos garriveratis Te had neighed 


Aſini rugiverant The lords had oye 


\ures audi iyerunt Old women granted 
$31, 4+ 41 


4 Hententes. The Second Phzale. Clap. XVIFhap.? 


1 331. 4: Tn uiſle, 4 N ; 
in #u Prever pert: Indicative, ' © Ta the Prater. pl. Tad 
docui aut bele I bad aduiſee 
Tu monuifti | Thon haft had 1 Thou hadſt taugbt 
Puer habt © (The Father bath adviſed The. boy had bel | 
Nos tenuimus e huve ming/ed We had mingled. 
Vos curruiſtiss 5: Feoabave tangle |} Te bad hae 
Yu! ene mn Natel Gol had roaſted 
332. 8. In ile. 

In the Præter · per. ice, „ In the Præter. pl. Ind. 

Ego ſedi T have cone Ego fugeram * 
Tu veniſti Thou haſt dinedd | Tu ſederas 
Vermis fugit The houſe hath tumbled. ver venerat 
Nos prandimus e ha ve nodded Nos rueramus 
Vos nuiſtis Te have ſitten Vos pranderatis 
o m have fed 


Domũs ruerunt en e nuerang 


$33. 6. In ile dubling. 


In the Przter-perf. Ind icat. In the Preter- pl. Ind, 
Ego ſteti T have run I had bung 
Tu cucurriſti . Thou haſt ſtood | Thou hadft run 
Vultus cecidit A thief hath hung be ſparrow had ſung 
Nos pe ped imus We have ſung We had fallen 
Vos ceciniſtis Te have broke wind Te had brike wind 
Fures pependerunt Countenances have fell | Feet had ſtood 


534. 7. In ſiſſe. 


la the Præter · perf. Indicat. In the Przter-p!. Ind. 


go ceſſi I have laughed | Ego riſeram I had ftuck 
Tu manfiſti Thou haſt play'd Tu hzſeras Thou had ſt abid 
Pumilio hæſit 5 torch hath ſhined | Eliſa manſerat A candle had ſhin 
Nos riſimus e have gone off ; Nos ceſſeramus We had laughed 
Vos Iufiſtis 72 bave abiden | Vos luſeratis Te had gone off 
Fices luxerunt Dwarfs have ſtuck | Candelz luxerant Fiſhes had play 


Q. Is this all that is to be learned about the Second Phraſe?” 


Wer & | 


nſer & 
Q. V 
536. 
hich 7, 
Q 
337. 
Q. Wi 
338. 
amanc 

V 


iſcere 
itari p 
rmire 
340. 3 
re the 
f whic] 
Q Wh 
541. 
the N 
gliſned 
n * 
ominati 
cuſart\ 


$35. A. There are three things yet to be hoted about this Second PhraY 


x. Two Nominative Caſes Singular, coupled together, ſpeak of more tha 
one; and ſo being of the Plural Number, muſt have a Verb Plural. 
Samuel & Benjaminus ludunt. Where obſerve. . | 

1, Land another is as much as we the fitſt Perſon Plural. 

2. Thou and another is as much as ye the ſecond Perſon Plural. 

3. He and another is as much as #bey the third Perſon Plural 4, 
Ego & tu cœnamus J and thou do dine 
Ego & Petrus jenramus I and Fames do laugh _.. 

Tu & porcus grunniebatis Thou and Jobn were a ſwearing 
1. * leo rutiebatis Thou and the aſs were a Jitaying , 


: 


VI Pap. XVI. Sertentes. Che Third Phꝛale. 


0 yer & bubo 2 T᷑jöue ſun, and the moon will 2 f 
aer & olor nabunt The thief and the robber will bang 
nd . Which is the ſecond thing t) be obſerved here ? _ 
' $ 535+ 4. 2. Not only Nouns and Pron. Subſt. but whatever denotes 405 / 
lich zs, or doth, or js gone, is accounred for a Nom. Caſe to the Yerb, J 
Jen many ſuch are there? 3 1 
1537. 4. Three. r. The Gerund in dum is the Nom. to the Verb. 
Q. What is the Gerund in dum ? | 
538, A. The Gerund in dum is the Neur, Gend. of che Participle ihe; 
amandum, docendum; and it ſignifies that an act muſt be done; as, 
Amandum eſt Loving muſt be 
Ind. Scribendum erat There ſhould have been writing 
Fugiendum erit . There will be a neceſſity to fee 
5 There is to learn 
There was a neceſſity < to beat 
There will be © to fight | 
839. 2. The Verb Infinite often tells what js, does, or ſuffers, and then 
is the Nomin. to the Verb Finite; as, | 
iſcere_juvat To try will help Laviſſe nocuit To have play'dirbeth = 
itari placer. Ty eat will pleaſe | Tacuiſſe puduir To have worn hurteth = 
Ind. Nrmiĩre libet Todrink will like | Fod iſſe piguit. To have ſlept pleaſeth | 
540. 3. A Verb Infinite, with an Accuſ. before ir, may be the Nom, be- 


re the Verb Finite, And ſo may any Sentence that ſhews what! * Ge. 4 

ing f which 2 ſnall ſee Exemples in the next Rule, 4 
Id ch is the third thing to be obſerved in the ſecond Phraſe ? |- 
541, 4, 3. Note, that if the Verb be Infinite, the Word that ſhould be f 
the Nom. muſt be put into the 2 ccuſative Caſe, And then itis moſtly N 
gliſned by that before it; as, Angelos uivere patet, that Angels live is = 

ar. Qu. What is clear ? A. That Angels live; and therefore that's the 120 


dminative Caſe to patet. Qu. What lives? Angels, therefore thats che 
Feuſative before the Verb Infinite. 


— om — —— 2 — 
44 
- * 
* 333 
wy 
= —_—_ * o 


abideamum peccaviſſe liquer That the moon elitters is clear 

! ſhineſſſm edifle nocuit CET That boys have play d is plain 

hed riſtum vixiſſe patet That girls learn pleaſeth 

> off IN B. And thus you bave learned to expreſs that ſomething is, does,” or 
Lay ers. 

aq 

Phra N - £465 

re th S. 3. The Third Phzake. 


0. Which is the third ſtep towards making a Latin Sentence? 
$42. 4. The next thing is to exprefs that a thing is ſuch a thing, or 
made ſuch à thing, or thought, or called ſuch a thing; as, I am a ow 
Girl becomes a Woman. Cows are called Cattle. 
%, BY. How did the Latins do this ? 
$43. A. If the Verb of the Second Phraſe were 

| 1. A Verb of Being, as eſſe to be, fore to be. Or, 
\ A Verb of being made, as fieri to be made, to become. Or, 
g p +, A verb of being thought, 45 putari, æſtimari, habẽri. Or, - 

| 4 


FP * 


Sentenges-; The Third Phnaſe- Chop: XV 


4. T of being called, as. vocari, dici, Ge. 
Then they put another, Subſlantive aſter the verb in the fame Ca 
that the Subſtantive before the Verb was in. 


Q. Give, me EXEMPLES of: this third Free Fawn PE . 

. ” 2 5 ; 
248 l. homo | } Arbor habetur planta vos vocamini magiſtt 
Tu fies aſnus Nos æſtimamur Apoſtoli Enſes dicuntur arms. 

Q. 69 Wok is the RULE | to teach me to do this? 


345. 4 
, Toexpreſs that 5 


ſuch a thing ſuch a thing 


Firſt, put down the Firſt Subſt. and its Verb, as in the Sec. Phraſe, 

Then put the Second Subſt. after the Verb, in the fame Cafe that t 
Subſtantive before it is in. 

Or, Sum, forem, fio, exiſto, and certain verbs paſſives of being though 
and called, will have ſuch Caſe aſter them as they had before them. 

Q. Now give me ſome imitations of this third Phraſe ? 


6. 4. | 
28 pater I am a grand father Ego eram mater 
Tu cs flies Thon art a grandchild | Tu eras ſoror 
Martha eſt filia A womanis a mother {© Robercus erat frater 
Nos ſumus avi We are fathers Nos eramus virgines 


Vos eratis puellæ 

Viri erant pueri 
Ego fui or, 

Tu fuiſti diſcipulus 


Vos eſtis nepotes Te are ons 
Mulieres ſunt matres Girls are daughters 


Ego ero judex I will be a thief 

Ty cris miniſter Thou wi't te acut-throat 
Gulielmus eric fur The maid will be a Mrs. | Presbyter fuit diacon 
Nos erimus latrones Ie will be judges Nos fuimus proceres 
Vos eritis adultèri Te well be bogs | Vos fuiſtis cives 


Ancillz eruat herz Scholars will be maſters | Duces fuerunt milite 
| | 2. Exemples of fieri, to become 
Morbus fit febris Meat becomes feſh Young ones become bird; 


Drink became urine Calves were made bulls 


Blood will become milk 


Puer fiebat vir 
Amor fiet od tum 


3. Exemples of putari, æſtimari, haberi. 
Ego putabor gigas Nos habebimur beſtiz I am thought an om 
Tu æſtimaberis pumilio Vos æſtimabimini bubones Thou art eſteem d an 
Capo habebitur gallus Gallinæ putabuntur olores | 4 waſp's accounted a 


YE Exemples of vocari, dici. 
I was called a camel We are called my 
| Thouwaſt called an elephant Cotes were called: 


Ego vocor umbra 
Tu diceris vipera 


Lambs will be made ſh! 


Cha Cha 


place 
Pude 

N. 
learn 
t.n T 


Q 
548 
opus, 


$45 
The 
* 
550 
Active 
Q. 7 
551 
1 
there 
The ac 
or ſm; 
9, B 
ſaid to 
to do, 


Or fo cy 


Now 


an Acct 


Q. 6 


aber fo 


N. 347, If theſe Verbs be uſed infinite, the Word after them mui be c juva 
into the Accuſ. Caſe, as the Word ps dew them was. 
Liquet me eſſe patrem 


See No. 541. as, 
It is clear that I am 4 & andfather. 5 


— — — —— 


05 ſer v: 
Pl Jes cre 


Chap. XVI. Sentences. The Fourth Phrale. 82 


Placer te eſſe filium It. us pleaſing that thou art a grandchild 
Puder me fieri furem It's ſhameful that. Soldiers have been thieves, 
N. B. 1, The reaſon why the two Subſt. are put in the ſame Caſe, you will 
learn in the IX, Phraſe. 2. The Nominative Caſe is no mare uſed in the La- 
tn Tongue but in theſe two Phraſes, MT 4 


| S8. IV. The Fourth Phaſe, 
Q. Which is the Fourth Phraſe 2 | 
548. 4. The Fourth Phraſe is coexpreſsan Aﬀing on ſomething, as, facere 
opus, e d 4 work; amare bellum, to love war; claudere os, to ſhut the mouth. 
Q What two Words make this Fourth Phraſe ? 
549. 4. The 1. is a Verb that betokens fo act upon ſomewhat 2? 
The 2. is a Subſt. in the Accuſ. Caſe, that betokens the thing acted on. 
Q It ſeems then that all Verbs cannot be uſed in this Phraſe ? 
ph} 330. A. No, For no Verbs Neuter, nor Verbs Paſſive, nor all Verbs 
m. Active neither, can have thus an Accuſative Caſe after them. 
Q. Tell me which Verbs 4ive may, and which may not be uſed in this Phraſe. 
551. A. A Verb Active betokens to do, and of ſuch there are two ſorts, 
1. Some ſo betoken to act, that the action paſſes over on ſomething, and 
there is ſomethiog done, or aFed upon, as in, cædere canem, to ſmite a dog. 
ter The action of ſmiting paſſes upon the dog: The dog is the thing acted upon, 
nes er /m:tten,; and fuch Verbs are called Tranſitive, from tranſire ? paſs over. 
| ?, Bur ſome Verbs Active beroken barely to do, and there is no action 
Aid ro paſs over upon any thing. Soregnare, nare, repere. Theſe ſignifie 
to do, treign, toſw'm, to creep, bur we ſay not to reign any thing, to ſwim, 
or to creep any thing; and theſe are called Verbs Intranſitive, 


* FR Now only Verbs Tranſitive which beroken to a& on ſomething, can have 
hh ju an Accuſarive Caſe after them, according to this Phraſe. 


Q. Give me ſome EXEMPLES of this Phraſe ? 
$52 A, : | 
deus creavit mundum The world is the thing created ) And therefore is 
Dominus formavithominem Man is the thing formed pur in the Ac- 
omo colebar horrum The garden is the thing tilled S cuſative Caſe. 
Q. Give me the RULE -f the fourth Phraſe ? 
A, To expreſs an acting on ſomething, 
1. Pur down a Verb Tranſitive. And 5 
2, Add to it the Subſt. Name of the thing acted upon, in the Acc. Caſe. 
Or, all ſuch Verbs as are Tranſitives have after them an Accuſative Caſe. 
n bat doth this Rule teach more than I new befre? 
553. A. Only to put an Accuſative Caſe afrer a Verb Tranſitive. 
reda Q Give me ſome EXERCISES for imifatiin of this? a 


lite 


birds 
bulls 
de (he! 


554 4.— POTN 
so orno ædes I change a garment Ego arabam agrum 
geeſe Fu muras veſtes © Phon keepeſt gowns Tu planrabas plantam 
les Faber format claves A ſheep makes a lamb | Aer necabat herbam 
uſt be tos juvamus plebem We adorn 4 building | Nos vorabamus pyra 

Sy Os ſervatis togam Tie help the rabble | Vos vitabatis vitia 


es Creant aguos Smiths form a le Apes guſtabant thymum 
, 2 f f 3 41 I ball 


- 


82 _____ Sentences. The Fourth Phjaſe. Chap. XVI. YCkaj 


1 ſhall love the apples Ego turbavi ſontem May's Ego; 
Thou ſhalt like the cherries Tu ſtrangulaviſti vermem Tu pi 
The leaf will hide the grapes vulpes damnavit uvas „ 
' We will kill the locuſts | Nos probavimus poma a 5g: 
Te will number the flowers Vos laudaviſtis pruna een 
Tongues will praiſe the nuts Rami portaverunt fructus  Barcem 
Ego docueram diſcipulos | 1 had (upped up the pottage 
Tu forbueras cereviſiam Thou had ſt held the butter Q 
Paulus tenuerat poculum Peter had had the wine 35 3 
Nos exercueramus artem e had taught the Church _ os BY. 
Vos arcueratis hoſtem. _ | Te had exerciſed the ſoldiers 0 
Vaſa habuerant mel Armies had kept off armies 5 
Ego carpſi mala WE . | Thaove eat a cher The 
Tu ed iſti ceraſa | | Thou baſt drunk wine Gin 
Pediculus ſuxit ſanguinem I The bear bath crop'd an apple 2. Nui 
Nos bibimus aquam | We have ſucked waters | kme 
Vos mand iſtis panem Te have knawed cheeſes | Rex 
Mures roſerunt caſeum | His bave champed beans Q. ( 
Ego venor cervum I ſmell ivies Ego patiar te 560, 
Tu ſequeris leporem Thou look eſt to the peaſe Tu ſolaberis me [fter a 
Mas tuẽtur foeminam The hare follows the dig Sara mirabitur ſe 1. St 
Nos ordimur fabulam We deſerve honour _. Nos hortabimur vos 2. T 
Vos meremini laudem Te begin ſtyries Vos imitabimini nos V. B 
Koedi odorantur hederamCats bunt flies Teſtes verebuntur ſe Shofitio! 
Q. Are only Nouns and Pronouns Subſtantive the Accuſative Caſe aft Give 
Verbs Tranſitive ? 5 | 9. Ubi 
555. A. Not only Nouns and Pronouns Subſtantive, but whatever othe Ezo 


word or words beroken the thing done or a&ed upon, are accounted til Fan 
Accuſative Caſe to the Verb Tranfitive, 8 „Gute 
S8 1. A Verb Infinite is the Accuſative Caſe after the Verb Tranſitive Ne 
And therefore 


7 


Ego amo ludere v C to play I e b. Und 
Tu cupis dormire 2 85 ſleep >= Odeſired <, accounted of i Ri; 
Mus conatur currere ? S n = # endeavoured # Accuſative Cai Scho 
Ego didici ſcribere I dare to fight Delphin non vult capi. Quo 
Scapha ſolet nare Thou uſeſt to bray Nos experimur ſeire Nos 
Pulices audent mordere An animal loves to eat Pueri debent conſiderib Quar 
 Q\Which is the ſecond thing put after Verbs Tranſitive as an Accuſative ca Nix 
$56. A. II, An Infinite Verb with an Accuſative before it according Glaci 
No. $41. is put oſt as an Accuſ. after a Verb Trauſitive. As, Gran 
Nos ſcimus leonem rugire That a lion roars en tnown O and 10Y Hiem 
Ego video torrem ardere That à brand burns we © 2 ſeen S the i} Imbe 
Tu negas tubam ſonare That a trumpet ſounds thing denied A cul.Ca. An c. 
Ego ſentio ignem urère T think that the King comes Hum 
Iu putas te yalere Thon believeſt that ſtones live N Quor' 
Bubo credit ſe cantre John ſaith that he feareth _ Ego! 
Nos fcimus vos furtre We feel that live coals burn Suſan 
Vos diciris nos ridere Tie ſay that hens prate Nos et 


— 


Homjacs aiunt vapores ori ld women think that flars fall ¶ Tum 


* 


1 Chip. XVI. _ Sentences. The Fifth Phaſe, 


83 


Ego judico vos. + dorguivitle: le 
Tu putas cellam arſifle 
petrus jurat ſe metuiſſe 


arcem ! Ecce altaria Hem. Dauum tibi 


; 

Kg 
8. v. The Fifth.Phzaſe. 10 
Q. Which is the Fifth ſtep to be-made in making Sentences ? | 


— —kꝑꝶ [r 
2 have Tnomn that play hath harmed Lit 
Thou remembreſt that the earth hath quaked Hi 
The man hopes that faults have been hid | 

537. N. B. The Inter jections, En! Ecce! Hem! Proh land Apage (which aa 
indeed is a Verb) when uſed n have an Accuſative Caſe; as, En 


Proh fidem ! Apage iftam ſalutem / 


358. 4. The fifth Phraſe is when we expreſs our thoughts by an Adyerb 
or Prepoſition added to a Verb: as, To love nom, To ſtay here, &c. 

Q. Which then are the tw words velating to each other in this Phraſe? 

559. 4. The firſt is a Verb, as ſer down by the Second Phraſe, 

The ſecond is an Adverb or Prepoſition added to chat Verb. 


Give me ſome EXEMPLES. 
2. Num Rex venit? 
4. Imo Rex venir 

Rex non venit 

Q. Give me the Rule of this Phraſe ? 


Q. An tu ſcribis ? 
A. Næ ego ſcribo 
Ego haud fcribo 


2. Luduntne pueri: 4 


A. Purri quidem ludunt 
Tu ne lude 


1 


560, A. When you expreſs your thought by an Adverb or Frepoſion 


after a Verb, 


1. Set down the Verb according to the foregoing Rules, 


NV. B. So that all that this Rule teaches, is to put an Advert of Fre- 


OS : To it add the Adverb or Prepoſition. 
105 

ſe Poſition to the Verb. 

ai "Give me ſome IMITATIONS. 


D. Ubi vos habitatis? 
Ego habito hic 
Familia habitat ibi 


vid uſquam maner dia? Q 
ve; mbræ manent nutquam 
ore p. Unde res veniunt? | 
of u Rixz veniunt hine 
: Cai Schola migravit inde 
capi. Quo vos gradimini?  - 


Nos gradimur huc 
Quando venit hiems? 
Nix cecidit hëxi 
Glacies venit dudum 
Grando crepavit olim 
Hiems fremit / 111 SY 
| Imber yenit mox 
An cœlum ruit unquam? 
Humus ardet unquam 
„ Quoties tu legiſti biblia? 
Ego legi biblia ſemel 
Suſanna legit Lucam bis 
Nos erravimus ſæpe | 
Tu mentiris ſemper © o 
W 2 


2 


Q 


alt 


bs Whore dwell the tribes z . 


The tribes dwell here 

Fumilies dwell there 

175 any where lives lang? nh 
A (hadow continues nd whi 


Q. Whence flit the Schools 2” 


The Schools flit hen ee. 
Aguarrel ariſel thenees 


Q i becher fly tie birds ? 


The par rom flies h ther 
When chme ſhowers 2? 111 0 
Showers fell yeſterday 
Winter roared long ago 
I (aw Hail long ſince 
Snows fall now ' © 
Froſts will follow ſtraight 
Do ftars tumble ever 8 © 

A ſtar will never fall 
© off have you read Matthias U 
We have read Matthew once 
"The Boys have read Mark twice. 
Te have blotted books re BEI 


Than weft to play always - 


_— 


85 Sententeg. The Sirth Phzaſe; Chap. Xv1.JChap 


Q. Quomodo homines loquuntur? Q. How do boys play? | 13 Cr 
A. Lucas loquitur temre A. Fobn plays raſhly I Po 
Nos loquimur fruſtra ' , Fames endeavours in vain $15 Be 
Turba fatur ſimul Peter and Paul play together 16 Pe 

Tu i prz | 1 will go before 17 He 
Ego ibo pone Come thou after \y 18 * 

c S. VI. The Dirth Phzaſe- 19 Le 

-..Q. What is the ſixth Phraſe? 20 Eg 


561. A, The Prepoſition in the former Phraſe ever ſignifies a regard! 
ſometh;ng: as, If you go before, you go before ſomething ; If I come after,” E 
I come after ſomething. Now the Sixth Phraſe will teach you how right! 5 E 


to expreſs that thing: as, $4 = 
Go thou before me I will come after thee * Gr 


Q.. Which are the twa Words relating to each other in this Phraſe ? GI 
562. A, The firſt is a Prepoſition, as ſer down by the fifth Phraſe. s Peg 
The ſecond is the Subſtantive Name of the thing it points at. 

Q. Give me ſome EXEMPLES to make this plain. 


$63, A... | | 

Ego eo ad templum Tu ſtas ante oftium N. 

Miles jacet intra palatium _ - _ Caſz ſtruuntur apud forum II Ego 
Q. Which is the RULE of the ſixth Phraſe ? 6. Pane 
304. 4. To expreſs the regards of one thing to another. 2 Abſq 
I. Put down a Prepofition according to the former Rule. 2 Tui 
II. To it put the Name of the thing it points at, in the right Caſe. I Mut 
Q. What doth this Rule teach new ? f 5s Ego 


565. A. Only to put the Subſtant. after the Prep. in its right Caſe. 
Q Which is the right Caſe after the Prep)fition * _ 
$66, 4. 1. After the firſt 27 Prepoſitions the Accuſative Caſe 85 th 


2, Aſter the next 12 the Ablative-Caſe _ right 
3. Aſtet the laſt ſometimes the Accuſ. and ſomerimes the Abl. YCaſc 


567. §. J. The firſt 27 Prepoſitions. No. 372. hai 


3 | . 11 Sch 
After them an Accuſative Caſe. 18 

x Cardo ſtridet ad janumm - © The keeper lies at the door 

Aurora vocat ancillam ad colum The evening calls boys to bed 569. 

2 Bellum geritur adverſus hoſtes Exerciſe thou fear towards God ſubt 

3 Cucumer venditur apud forum Tables are bought at the Town hows 

4 Tenebræ non migrant ante lucem Heſh is dreſſed before the fire 

5 Aula paret cis culinam The kitchin lies behither the hall Ii Tu d 

6 Turres videntur citra arcem A caſtle is ſeen behither the tower | Rege 

7 Villz jacent circum urbem A wall is put about the fields 2 Map 

8 Pulices faliunt circa cameram A flea leaps about the walls Calre 

9 Tu noli offendere contra leges Faults were made againſt art 3 Vern 


10 Amor exercetur erga parentes Carry thy [elf well towards Magiſtra Vulp 
11 Greges paſcuntur extra oppidum Men feed a flock without the walls $4 Tu u 
42 Sanguis ſalit intra venas © The veins Jurk within the in Fabe 


6—— — — 
„ 1 - 


"1. Chap. XVI. - Sentences. The Hirth Phaſe. Os 85 


13 Crura ornantur infra genua The heel is placed beneath 7 
14 Poma ſparguncur inter puèros Divide ye the money among the girls 


1 
15 Boves arant juxta pagum The fiſhes ſwim by the mill vi 
16 Pœnæ debentur ob ſcelèra Boys are beaten for fault: 0 
17 Honor eſt penes Regem Honours have been with Kings 0 
18 Tu fallis magiſtrum per miniſtrum We deceive the mother by the daughter 1 
Canes venantur per valles A dog hunts through the valley 1 

19 Lepus cacavit pone arcam The doe lurks behind the wood | 


20 Ego ero apud fe poſt menſem e will be with you after an hour 


ir $5 Herus tribuit potum præter cibu Maſters give bread beſide fleſh 


„2 Virtũs debet coli propter ſe Do thou obey for love | 
450 23 Ego legi hiſtoriam ſecundum Marc. Exemples are made according to art 
St Arbor creſcit ſecus callem A roje grew by the lake 


25 Cornua tollunt ſe ſupra verticem The head lifts itfelf above the horns 
26 Grana portantur frans oceanum Swallows fly over the Sea 
ſe. £7 Gloria manebir ultra vitam Puniſhment remains beyond death 


568. 8. II. The next 12 Prepoſitions, N*. 373. have 
an Ablative Caſe after them. 


N. B. Ab before a Vowel, à before a conſonant; and juſt ſo ex and ee. 
1 Ego novi te à capite ad calcem The wall will defend us from the ſpywer 


Panes coquuntur 4 populo The head is combed by the maid 
2 Abſque arte ſi eſſet nos moreremur Were it not for you we ſhould play 
2 Tu indue pallium cum tunica We put on the coat with the cloak 


aſe. BY Mures lingunt butyr. coram coquo Scholars laugh before the Maſter 
Ego duxi uxorem clam Patre Wives are taten unknown to Fathers 


ſc. e Murmur auditur de luco We bear murmurs out of the wood 
| MNulieres garriunt de ſupellectile A woman will prate of a gooſe _ 
is ca) Nihil fit ex nihilo Glaſſes may be made of aſhes _ 
riglie ru noli meiere palam populo Do not thou pray before the rabble 
Caſeſy Balænæ agunt haleces pre ſe A wolf drives the ſheep before him 
Femora tremunt pre timore The heart leaps tor joy 3” 08 
halo Gentes colunt imaginem pro Deo Zo count an hav 1-4 a pound 
11 Schola non regitur ſine cura Schools can't be ruled without a Maſter 


12 Vos odiſtis ſcelera verbo tens Cover the breaſt up to th? necł. 


Iss. S. III. Theſe four Prepoſitions, In, ſub, ſuper, and 
I ſubter, when they denote motion into or towards 2 thing, 
have an Accuſative Caſe, otherwiſe an Ablative. 


all I Tu divide ſyllabam in literas We divide words into /yllables 
wer Reges ſolent ſedere in throno Fewels uſe to be put in à crown 
_ 2 Mappa cecidir ſub cathedram The krives are fallen down under the 
Calrer jacet ſub diſco Dye d ſhes lie under the napkins | table 
3 Vermis naſcitur ſubter terra Worms live under ground N 
iſtru Vulpes current ſubter collem Fiſhes run in under ante 
»alls 4 Tu non debes cubare ſuper herum The maſter ſits above the miſſteſs 
= Faber loquitur /uper inſtrumencis Women tali about the wheel 
3 Cru. | 5 5 Q. Is 


86 Sentences... The Seventh Shaft. Chap. XVI. 


| Ml —— . 
CHF There any thing yet to be noted about this Sixth Phraſe ? , 
570, A. Note. 1. That the Accuſative of the Gerund, in Dum may be 
uſed after Ad, Ante, Inter, Ob, Propter; as,.. 4 
Exercirus alicur ad vincendum hoſtes #orſes rave before taming 
Nos lambimus jus inter edendum , Cy not out in dining time 
Ego ven propter defendendum te Ton came for to puniſh us 
571. Note 2. That the Ablative Caſe of the Gerund in Dim may be uſed 
after a, ab, abs, de, e, ex, cum, in, pro; as, 
Pueri cerrentur a diſcendo Dogs will nit be frighted from barking 
Vos facitis verba de lavando Te make delays about painting 
Pcenz oriuntur ex temère agendo Praiſe will ariſe from ſtudying 
572. Note. 3. That the natural place of the Prepoſ. is next before its Caſe, 
But 1. Sometimes the Prepoſition is ſer before the Verb and compound - 
ed wirh it. As. + v1 
Aves adeunt nidos, 1. e. eunt ad 
Dux anteir milites, 1. e. it ante Leaders will £0 before the Army 
Ego detrudo navem ſaxo Ships are thruſt from the ſtones 
573. N. B. Cum is ſec after me, te, ſe, qui, nobie, vobis, quibus. 
Quicum vos cupitis vivere? With whom diſt thou deſire to play ? 
Ego cupio vivere tecum Wilt thou dine with me? 
Tu ſperas ambulare mecum The Scholars did breakfaft with us 


S8. VII. The Seventh Phaſe. 

Q. Which is the Seventh Phraſe ? Mo * 

$74. 4. The Seventh Phraſe is to ſnew that what is, does, or is done, i 
ages, or is done to or for ſomething, that is, to irs uſe, gain or loſs, 

_ Q. Which then are the two Words that make this Phraſe 2 

$75. A. The firſt is a Verb ſer down by the ſecond Phraſe, 

The ſecond is a Subſtantive of the Dative Caſe; as, I write for you. 

N. B. Here the Engliſh before the Subſtantive uſe to or for according 
to the Sixth Phraſe. But in Latin they uſe a Dative Caſe. 

Q. 135 me ſome EXEMPLES of this ? 

576. A. _ 16 b 

Locus fuir confilio ] Tu ſregiſti nuces ſimiæ | Nux datur fimiis 

Pax crit eccleſiz I Anna ſervat baccas fibi | Buccæ ſervantur vobi 
Q. Which is the RULE of the Seventh Phraſe? 
$77. 4, When you are to expreſs chat ſomething ic, does, or is dont 

go or for a thing, 7. e. to irs gain or loſs, © _ 

I. Pur down the Verb according to the Secand Phraſe. 

II. Add co it the name of that thing in the Dative Caſe. 
Or, All manner of Verbs put Acquiſitively will have a Dative Caſe, 
Q. What mean you by Verbs put Acquiſitively⸗ e? 

578. 4, Then is a Verb pur Acquiſitively, when by it is expreſſed th: 
me good or bad is acquired, or got to or for ſomething. 

Q. What doth this Rule teach you more than you learned before ? 
. $79. A. Only to put a Dative Caſe to a Verb put Acquiſitively ? 

T . me ſome IMITATIONS of the Seventh Phraſe? 
e:. & 


The Biſhop goes to the Church 


© Ege 


Chap 
Ego p 
Ancil 
Locuſt 
Vos ſe 
Fraud 
Boves 
Labor 
Juga } 
Pecun 

581 
Give | 
I ſekt 
We ha 

582 
ſeems 
Civira 
Magiſ 
Eccie! 

RY 

583 
Acqui 
Hem 1 
En alt 
Ecce 


VI. 


— 


be 


uſed 


King 


Caſe, 
und-. 


le o 


d cha 


Ege 


Chap. XVI. Sentences. Che Eighth Phꝛafe. 87 


Ego pandam feneſtram muſcis Do not thon open the windows to the wind 

ancilla molit frugem familiz Mules grind peas for the men: ſervants 

Locuſta quærit ſibi cibum Locuſts ſeek to themſelves dew 

Vos ſemper cedite parentibus Parents do not give way to ſons 

Fraudes non pariunt homini laudem Deceit brings glory to no body by 

Boves arant agros hominibus A bullock plows a field for the King 

Labores augentur diſcipulis Labour is increaſed to the Maſter _ 

Juga promuntur tauris A yoke ſhall be brought out for cows 

Pecunta numeratur Diacono Iwill number the ounces to the Biſhop 
581. N. B. 1. To is oft left out in Engliſh as eaſily underſtood; as, 

Give me the Cup, for to me Don anſwer them mithing 

I ſett the Doctor a guinea I wrote you a Letter 

We have caught you a bird, i.e. for you I will tel the Maſter this 


582. N. B. 2. Theſe following have a Dative, though the Engliſh of them 
ſeems to be Tranſitive, becauſe to cannot be well ſupplied. 


Civitas credit Magiſtratibus Magiſtrates believe the Citizens 
Magiſtratũs fidunt Civitati Cities truſt the Magiſtrates 
Eccleſia favet Epiſcopo. The Biſhops favour the Churches, 


So Studere, nocere, mederi, obedire, parcere, c. have a Dar. 

583. N. B. 3. The Interjections En, ecce, hem, hei, vz, are ſometimes put 
Acquiſitively, for Verbs with their Nominative, and have a Dative Caſe. 
Hem tibi Perrum Hei mihi Io à ſtable for horſes 
En altaria ſoli Vz vobis Behold a den for lions 
Ecce templum Lunz Here's Fohn for ym Alas for us 


$. VIII. The Eighth Phzaſe. 
Q. What is the Eighth Phraſe to expreſs ? * 


584. A. The Eighth Phraſe is to expreſs that one thing is the thing of 


another; as, The Book of the Maſter. | 
Q. Which are the two words related ty each other in this Phraſe ? 


585. 4. The Firſt is a Subſtantive of any Caſe as ſer down by any of 


the former Rules, | 


The ſecond is alſo a Subſtantive of the Genitive Caſe, telling who's or 


of what the other thing is. b 
N. B. In Engliſh either we put the Prepoſit ion of before the latter Subſſfantiue 
by the ſixth Phraſe, or put es or *s after it; and jet it before the other; af, 


The Book of the Maſter; or, The Maſter's Book: The Peace of the Church, 


or The Church's Peace. 
But in Latin the Genitive Caſe is de ſigned to ſignifie the ſame. 
Q. Give me ſome EXEMPLES of the Eighth Phraſe? 
586. 4. A Genitive is thus added to the Subſtantive: 


Of the Firſt Pb. O ſtella cœli. Heus fili Keginæ. 


Of the Second Ph, Pars maris ferver. ſecut beſtiarum voratur. 
Of the Third Ph. Ego ſum membrum Chriſti, Tu es dux 1{cho!e. ___ 
Of the Fourth Ph. An tu legiſti epiſtolas Pauli? Tu tenes caudam afini. 


Of the Sixth Ph. Canes cubant ad oftium domũs. Ros ſtar in vertice rolz. 


Of the Seventh Ph. Nos damus gloriam Domino mundi. 
Q. Now give me the RULE to direct me to make the like £ 2 


K — — — «wal 
_ p 3 — Bend — — „ = - ; _ ate 2 
2 ng —— en ab xo =: ' — vi — 4 
2 2 — x 2. ba w_— — a4, 
g — — — —— tet wu trons ft - 2 _ — — — 2 
2 P 8 _ 


. 


o 
K iq 
70 

if 
1 

1 

1 


88 Sentences. The NinthPhzaſe. Chap. XVI. Phap. 


387. A, To ſhew a thing to be the thing of another thing. Pfebe 5 
I. Put down a Subſtantive accord ing to the former Rules, Febe ! 
II. Add to it the ſecond Subſtantive in the Genitive Caſe. zs the 
or, When two Subſtantives come together, the latter ſhall be in the | And 
Genitive Caſe, if the one ſignify rhe thing of the other. ormer 
Q. What doth this Rule add to what I have learned bef;re ? fore t 
388. A. To put to a former Subſtantive another in the Genitive Caſe, | Q G 
Q. Give me ſome matter for IMITATION. g 595- 
589. A. 1. A Genitive put to the Subſtantive of each Phraſe, I. Se 

x, O duces populi O tongue of Angelis II. P 
O cives Londini O Sons of the Church | Or, | 
2. Cura juris decet hominem The care of works adorns the mind Q. G 
Preces fidei valent apud Deum The prayers of hope drive away ſorrow || 595. 

3. Nomen eſt ſignum rei Words are the names of things 0 p. 
Horz ſunt partes dici A day is a part of a month ES 
4. Mors tollit gaudia ſenſas Jos take away the dread of death f. Dom 
Palatum ſentit ſaporem fellis T he dug hath plenty of milk Dom 


6. Ego accuſo te de crimine luxus Thou accuſeſt me of the crime of anger 5 Malu 
Adamas micat inter lapides litoris Diamonds glitter among jewels of the _ 


crown B. 
Sudor fluit per canales cutis Blood will flow through a vein of the foot ui into 
7. Tu ne fide auxilio hoſtis e do not truſt to the help of a fly Ego 
Tu dic laudes Domino ætheris Sing thou praiſe to the Lord of life Tu f. 
$90, N. B. 1. Seldom the Verb Infinite is the Genitive Caſe; as, P Ju r 
Tempus eft ſolvere colla equorum t is not time to loſe the School Tu c 
Eſt tibi ſtudium cueri arcem We bave a deſire to ſow the garden F Tut 
591. N. B. 2. But moſtly the Genit. of the Gerund in dum ig thus put; 4, Ego! 
Odium diſcendi cepit vos Boys ſhow an hatred of knowing . Mar! 
Tu facito finem ludendi The end of ſinning is death I Give 
Nunquam fuit mihi otium ſcribendi 7s there not leiſure to plant? 
§. IX. The Ninth Phzaſe. d 


Q. Which is the ninth motion to be made t wards making a Sentence? Qu 
$92. 4, Sometimes the Subſtantive in the former Rules doth not ſuffici- 597- 
ently expreſs the thing meant by ir, and then there is need to add ano- NA 
ther Subſtantive which may more fully declare and explain it; and this''ve3 4 
is the Ninth Phraſe. 1 
Q. Which then are the twe words of the Ninth Phraſe? 598. 
$93. 4. The firſt is a Subſtantive ſer down by one of the former Rules. The 
The ſecond is another Subſtantive denoting the ſame thing added to it, 
Q. Give me ſome EXEMPLES to make this plain? | 599: 
$94. A. Thus a ſecond Subſtanrive is added to the Subſtantive. 1. Ph. 
Of the Firſt Ph. O Rex Carole, He that calls the King, calls Charles. k ing, 
Of the Second Ph. Rex Carolus regnat. If the King reigns, Charles reigns 
Of the Third Ph. Ille eſt Rex Carolus. If be be King, he is Charles. . Ph, 
Of the Fourth Ph. Amo regem Carolum. If T love the King, I love Charles. 
Of the Sixth Ph. Ego loquor de Rege Carolo, If 1 jpeak of the King, ! 
44 c 


| oo 


— 


VI. Chap. XVI. Sentences. The Tenth Phaſe. 89 


the Seventh Ph, Tu pare Regi Carolo. If you obey the King, you obey Charles 
f the Eighth Ph. Ego vidi thronum Regis Caroli. The throne of the King 
is the throne of Charles, 
the 4 therefore the latter Subſtantive is {till put in the ſame Caſe thatthe 
ormer was in. N. B. So that the firſt Sub ſtant ive's right Caſe muſt be known 
fore this Phraſe can be uſed; and therefore this Phraſe is the Ninth. 
aſe | Q Give me the RULE of the Ninth Phraſe? 
595. A. To ſhew what thing a thing is. | 
I. Set down the firſt Subſtantive according as the former Rules direct. 
II. Put to it another Subſt. denoting the ſame thing in the ſame Caſe. 
Or, Two Subſtanrives denoting one thing ſhall be pur both in one Caſe. 
Q. Give me (ome IMITATIONS? 
ow || 595. 4. 
O Domine Deus, tu bea ecclefiam O father Adam, regard thou God 
O ſeſu Chriſte, tu fove populum O wife Eve, follow thou vertue 


5 F. Dominus Magiſter vetat garrire The Gent. the M ſtreſs forbids to rove 
Domina Hera vellit piſa The Ladies, the Miſtreſſes pluck "my 
wer 5. Malus eſt arbor | Apple Trees are trees 
the} Ador putatur far | Salt is thought a mineral 


N. B. And here you ſee the reaſon why in the 3d Phraſe the ſecond Subſt. is 
» foot ut into the ſame Cale with the firſt, becauſe one is ſaid to be the other. 
. Ego legebam Paulum Apoſtolum I was hearing Henry the Biſhop 
Tu ſeris granum ſemen trugis We ſow grains the ſeeds of wheat 
. Tu rogas de bibliis lege vitæ We (peak of the bible the word of God 
Tu cave a Diabolo hoſte animæ Caſt an eye to the gie the place of ſtars 
n F Tu funde preces Deo Regi Thou gaveſt a reward to the Lord Fudge 
4 Ego miſi præmium Joanni fratri Spare thou the Soul the temple of God 
. Maria fuit filia Regis Henrici Charles was the ſon of King Charles 
Cives ſunt gloria urbis Londini Lo the end of vices the diſeaſes of ſouls ? 


$. X The Tenth Phzaſe, 


2 Q. What ic the Tenth Phraſe ? 
\ffici-} 597- 4. When we are to expreſs that the thing mentioned by any Sub- 
ano· Nant ive of the foregoing Rules is ſuch or ſuch, then we put to it an Adje- 
| this ve; as, 4 man is good or bad, wiſe or fooliſn, and this is the Tenth Ph aſe. 
Q. "Which then are the two words of the Tenth Phraſe? 
598. A, The Firſt is a Subſtantive of any Caſe, pur by a former Rule 
ales. | The Second is an Adjective added to that Subſtantive. 
to it. ] Q Give me ſome EXEMPLES of this ? 

$99. A. Exemples where an adjective i is joined to thar Subſtantive of 


ph O Domine bone O Domini boni. 
. e: „  O Domina bona Plur. Q O Dominæ bonæ 
+. O m b O Poma bon 
eigns, pomum bonum O fo a 
. Ph. Dominus bonus amatur Domini boni coluntur 
ale. Domina bona laudatur Domina bonæ quæruntur 
ing, 1 Pomum bonum voratur Poma bona eduntur 


— 0 


„ 
wu 


** 


0 ROD n wean K mw 
: CES) 
S rr = es i AG CR rr ater 


dat. ß 


* F * R N 
mn nee . 


V — 


* — Nn 


95 HSWententes. The Tenth PBhzaſe. Chap. XVIRhap. 


7. Ph. Ego placeo Domino bono 


Tu noces Dominæ bonæ 


4 Ph. Ego optavi Dominum bonum Ego invito Dominos bonos 


Quis nolit cedere Dominis bonis 
Tu deles maculas Dominis bonis 


Natura dat ſaporem pomo bonoDentes non parcunt pomis bonis 


artes 


u ſperaviſti Dominam bonam Tu vocas Dominas bonas nſus 

Mus quæſivit pomum bonum Sus quærit poma bona Fencur 
6. PRC mori pro Domino bono Nemo queritur de Dominis bonis ſmbz 
Quis dag cum Domina bona Ades ornantur a Dominis bonis eo eſt 
yult O prandere ſine pomo bono Corpora aluntur a pomis bonis, |. Qu 


„ Eg 
oanne 
obert 
ona | 


8. Ph, Ego credo verbis Domini boni Non eſt C Dominorum bonorum 1 
i Tu verris pallium Dominæ bonæ nobis {Dominarum bonarum % 
Naſus ſentit odorem pomi boni copia Pomorum bonorum 1 
N. B. Where all along you ſee the Adject, is put into the ſame Gender ar am co 
the ſame Caſe, and the ſame Number that the Subſtantive is of. am h. 
2. There fore the Rule of the AdjeR. is not to be taught till the right Cal 
of the Subſt. be known, and that was not before now. | . 
Q. Give me the RULE of the Tenth Phraſe ? uis he 
600. A. To ſhew a thing to be ſuch or ſuch. _ le loc 


I. Put down the Subſt, name of that thing by the former Rules. 8 
II. And co it add the Adj in the ſame Cale, ſame Gender, and Numbeſem f. 
Or, The Adjective, whether it be a Noun, Pronoun or Participle, ſhyBuzdat 
agree with its Subſtantive in Caſe, Gender and Number, 


c ch 


hac 


Acer miles haud metuit necem 


Tres ſunt teſtes in cœlo alto 


|  Q. Give me ſome IMITATIONS for exerciſe ? „ Utr 
. "VOL, #- | | | Nei 
O Deus æterne, tu ſemper manes O eternal Angels, ye ever ab de ter 4 
O fortuna mala, tu lædis homines O evil ſpirits, ye hurt ſouls 5 Cuji 
O omnes nationes, ne eſte brutæ O every Nation, fear thou wars Tu 


Homines juvenes ſpernunt ſenes An old man ſcorneth a young man I fax 
N. B. Sometimes there comes a Verb between them, and till they agree. 

Se pia ſolet eſſe nigra We ſee that ink is black 

Papyrus debet eſſe alba we know that Paper ought to be whit 


Maturæ olivz ſunt gratæ A ripe olive is acceptable arer a 
Filum novum ſarcit pannum veterem Mew threads patch old clothes os aue 
Linea rea ſecat lineam curvam A crooked line cuts a ſireight line 2, 


Res dubiæ movent mentem fortem A dubious matter moves ftout minds Bonus] 
Sclopus pellit pilam gravem Guns will ſend forth heavy bullets iu neg 
Tunica longa verrit humum Long coats (weep the ſtreets 

Death frights mt a brave ſoldier Igo ſu1 


Frons blanda arguit gaudium Foy makes a bl the forehead los ſur 
Solus homo eſt animal nudum Only men are naked animals 4. In 
Leo habet vim miram There is wonderful force in a lion | 

Fama vana turbat civitatem Vain fables trouble cities omo d 


Toga parva non eſt onus magnum Small gowns are not great burdens $yra au 


NQ. Quor ſunt res in natura rerum? Q. How many things are there here! 

A. There is one Queen in a Kinga. 

The parts of the bible are two N. B. 

The King gverns three — tus, 
* 


R. Unus eſt maximus Deus 
Sexus animalium ſunt duo 


VIFrap. XVI. Sentences. The Tenth Phzaſe. - 9L 


arres anni ſunt quatuor we The ſides of 4 Church are four + + 
nſus animalis ſunt quinque There are five fingers on one hand... 
entum anni dicuntur ſeculum An age holds an hundred years 
s Imbæ ma nus jam ſunt laſſæ Both feet are nw tired 44 
Jeo eſt rex beſtiarum ferarum A ſheep is the meat of a wild b 
. Quorus diſcipulus es tu? Q. Of wbat number am 1 N 
Ego ſum diſcipulus primus A. Thou art the firſt gir! 
| cannes eſt ſecundus Martha ought to be ſecond 
Pobertus heri erat tertius Betty deſerves to be third 
ona hora invirat ad jenraculum _ Brea#faſts are taken at the ninth hour 
I 602. N. B. When in Engliſh we by this Rule 41 an Adje#ive with am, the 
atin oft expreſs both by one Verb; as, 
am able Ego poſlum | Tam well, ſtrong Ego valeo See the 
r ai am cold Ego frigeo I am {i boat”... Ego fileo | Verbs 
am hot Ego caleo | | Tamglad Ego gaudeo Neuter 
2 603. 8. II. The Pronouns Adject ive. 
uis homo poreſt ſecare ſilices? What. n ves can cut pumices? 
le locus eſt profanus Thoſe places are prophane 
c charta non eſt pura Theſe papers are nit pure 
mbeſfem tolium habet florem dulcem The ſame leaves have ſweet flowers 
| ſhuſuzdam ſpatia func auguſta Some altats are larze 
1 hac ſtirpe non eſt frons ulla In theſe flocks there are not any leaves 
Utram genam cupis fricare? Which hand do you defire to ſcratch? 
Neutrum genu eſt claudum Neither hand hath been ſound 
ſtera gena erit fricanda 1 ſee the other hand lame 
. Cujus eſt hic culter? Whoſe Knives judge ye theſe to be? 
Tu ſcis hunc cultrum eſſe meum 7 think that that torch is mine 
py la fax noa poteſt eſſe tua All thoſe knives are yours 
a 604. S. III. The Participles Adjective. 
whit 1. In ans, ens, or jens, being or doing. 
ter amans habet amantem filjum Loving fathers have loving ſons 
os audivimus magiſtrum docentem The Maſter ſaw us learning 
ne 2, In andus, endw, ET iendus, to be done, that ought to be done. 


inds Bonus puer eſt laudandus Good girls are to be praiſed 
ts Fu negas pulicem eſſe prendendum I deny that moles are 82 be caught 
In urus, about to be, or about to do. | 


er Igo ſum iturus in ſcholam | We are about to go into the town 

los ſumus pranſuri apud re Tie are to ſup with me 

4. In tus or ſs. In Engliſh in d, t or n, done already, or being done, 
on or having done, or having been done. 

omo doctus terit multos libros Learned men wee! away many papers 
dens ta audita lolatur animum The ſound of harps heard is jweet. 
here! 
gd 605. How to make the Verb in i ſigniſie Perfecth. 

N. B. To make 4 Verb in 1 ſianiſie n you miſt uſe the Participle 
Ns tus, ſus or = with the Verb elle; 4, : 

Par Amati 


by 


Sententes. The Elebenth Phyaſe. Chap. XViſchap. 


. mari # be loved, amatus eſſe or fuiſſe to have been loved. 

oceri to be taught, doctus eſſe or fuiſſe 7d have been taught. "IH 
Legi to be read, lectus eſſe or fuiſſe to have been read. Q. | 
Audiri to be heard, audirus eſſe or fuiſſe to have been heard. 611 
 PraterperfeRt Tenfe P Przrerplup. Tenſe. e are 

Ego amatus ſum T have been liked Ego habitus eram A chile 
Tu probatus es Thou haſt been eſteemed Tu doctus eras © QI 
Arbor plantata eſt A Port has been ſhut Litera lecta erat 612 
Nos nati fuimus *' We have been frighted Nos viſi eramus The 
Vos petiti fuiſtis Te have been planted Vos capti eratis Q | 
Portæ clauſæ fuẽrunt Laws have been made Templa ſtrudta erant 4. 
Future Perf. Ego amatus ero vel fuero 7 ſhall have been loved, &c. Q. ( 
606. So in Verbs Deponents ſignifying Actively. 613 
Loqui to ſpeak, Locutus eſſe or fuiſſe to have or had ſpoken. fuer e 
Labi #0 ſlip, Lapſus eſſe or fuiſſe to have or had ſlipe, Ft 
Mirari to wonder, Miratus eſſe or fuiſſe to have or had wondered. Q. 
Præterperſect. Præterplup. 614 

Ego locutus ſum I have endeavoured Ego greſſus fueram I, P 
Tu miratus es Thou haſt ſlipped Tu miſſus fueras II. 
Coquus mentitus eſt The Sun has riſen Miniſter meditatus fueta Or, 
Nos lapſi ſumus We have lyed Nos fati fueramus 1 
Vos conati eſtis Te have wondred Vos faſſi fueratis Chriſti 
Stellz ortz ſunt Apes have ſpoken Epiſcopi precati fueranFſeſus « 

| eg ir pil 

| Libra 

S. XI. The Eleventh Phzale. uſfis 

$2vi v 


Q. Which is the Eleventh Phraſe ? Nn tu 
5607. A. As Adv. and Prep. are joyned to Verbs by the V. Phraſe, ſꝙpublic 
may they be to Adject, or Adverbs; as, 4 man very good. Rex h 
Q. Which are the two words in this Phraſe ? 
608. A, The I. is an Adject. or Subſt. or Adverb ſer down by the for 
mer Rules, the II. is an Adverb or Prepoſition added to it. Q 1 
N. B. So that all that you learn by the Eleventh Phraſe is to put an Advery 


er Prepoſation to ſome word going before. | uh 
Q. Give me the EXEMPLES of this? | Q i 
sog. A. 4 41 | 
Salix eſt arbor haud alta Tu habes uxorem vix ſanam ory 
Senes ſunt bis pueri Nemo vivit liber a curis | llites 
Q. Which is the RULE of the Eleventh Phraſe? Q.| 
610. A. As Adverbs and Prepoſitions are joined to Verbs, ſo are the 6 : 
to Ad jectives, Subſtantives and Adverbs; as, y 
Fauci pueri ſunt ſemper lzti Few wives are always mild * 
Omnes fere ſunt ſobrii Almoſt all Churches are large K 
Tu habes ftatrem vix virum Be not crue! towards any animal 


Bos jacet feſſus de via Dogs are fierce againſt bears D 
Quercus ſtar procul a ſtabulo The flable ſtond far from the oak . 1 


8. X 


— 


X\V1Fchap. XVI. Sentences.” The XII, XIII. Phaſes. _ Wo 


„ 


8. XIl. The Twelfth Phrale. 


0. Let us ſee now the twelfth ſtep towards making a Sentence: 7 
611. A. The twelfth Phraſe is juſt like the ſeventh. and is uſed when 
ye are to expreſs that a thing is ſuch or {uch to or fox any thing; a5, 
A child is dear to the Father. Learning is uſeful to boys, 
Q. Which are the two words in the Twelfth Phraſe ? 
612. A. The I. is an Adject. ſer down by the tenth Rule. 
The II. is a Subſt. of the Dative Caſe added to it. 
Q. What doth this teach more than I knew before? 
ne A. Only to put a Dative after an Adjettive put aequiſitirely: 
Q. Give me the EXEMPLES? 


iſe, 


613. 4. | 
Puer eſt charus parenti Hordeum habetur gratum ſuibug 
jteræ ſunt utiles pueris Labores ſunt moleſti corpori 


ed. Q. Give me the RULE. 

614. 4. When you expreſs that a thing is ſuch or ſuch to or for another; 

I. Pur down the AdjeQive according to the Tenth Rule. 

If. Pur to it the Subſtantive name of that thing in the Dative Caſe. 
fuera Or, Adjectives that betoken pꝛoſit or dilpꝛoft, likeneſg or unlike- 
eſs, Cc. require a Dative Caſe? as, 
hriſtus eſt bonus anime piz Thunderbolt s are not good to men 
ueranfJſeſus erit ſimilis amanri patri Devils are like to roaring lions 
ir pius non eſt d iſſimilis filio They are not unlike to fierce ſerpents 


Libra eſt par duodecem uncus Twelve ounces are equal to a pound 
uſſis non elt levis pueris The plague is uo light thing to uc 
Fa vi viri ſunt mites nemini A mild man is cruel to none 


in tu putas hoſtem amicum hoſti? Can enemies be friendly to enemies 2 
ſe, [Publica res eſt communis omnibus Publick things are common toeach one 
Rex habet hortum proprium ſibi Kings have thrones proper to them. 


ne for S. XIII. The Thirteenth Phzaſe. 
Aae N What is the Thirteenth and laſt Phraſe / 
YL 615. 4. The thirteenth Phraſe is like the eighth, and is when an Adjetls 
ath afrer ir a Genitive Caſe; as, A man greedy of money. 
Q- Which then are the two wards related to one another here N 
616. 4. The I. is an Adject. fer down by rhe Tenth Rule. 
The II. is a Subſt, of the Genitive Cafe pur to it; as, 
Milires debenr eſſe gnari armorum. Hic puer eſt rudis licerarum. 
Q. What Aajectives are they that govern a Genitive Caſe 2 


e NY 67. 4. Not all Adjett. have a Gen, Caſe, bur only thoſe that ſignifies 


Able, as, potis, compos, potens, Able. Patiens able to bear 
or Unable, as impos, impotens, unable. Impatiens unable to bear. 
; | Knowing, as, certus, doctus, peritus, &ilful. Memor mindful. 
: or Ignorant, as, incertus, indoctus, imperitus, immemor, rudis. 
Deſirous, as, amans, avarus, greedy.. Cupidus, covetous. 
or Regardleſs, as, largus, negligens, negligent. robges prodigal. 
& Num give me the RULE G4 the Thirteeuth Phraſe ? 


„ XII 


618, A, 


84 


-.. Simple Sententes. Chap. XVI 
618, 4. To declare? Able or}. { Knowing Ia f Defirous or? of an 
that any thing is Unable P T or Ignorant f \ Regardleſs by ing, 


I. Put down the Adjective according to the Tenth Phraſe. 
And Il. to it put the Subſt. in the Genitive Caſe; 


. Or, Adjettives that ſignifie Deſire, knowledge, Remembyanc 

Ignorante, and ſuch like, require a Genirive Caſe; as, 

Vir ebrius non, eft compos mentis Sober men are maſters of themſetve; 

Mulier laſcivs eſt i impos atme anton women are not miftreſſes | 
their heart | 

Falſe God's have hot power of thunder 

Fooliſh mothers can't manage their In 


No man can be ſure of living 
Ego video te efle doctum pilæ Bs ought not to be till d at dice 
Duces debent eſſe periti belli The Maſter is a skilful uſer of the har 


Nos debemus vivere memgores mortis Te ought to be mindful of virtue 
Homines vivunt immemores ofticti Be not unmind ful of the laſt hour 


Vir amans vini eſt prodigus nummi Men lovers of ale are laviſh of gold 
Tu es cupidus novarum rerum Te are covetous of little things 


Mn And thus you have ſeen the thirteen Phraſes and their Rules, b 
which Words are put rightly together to make Sentences, 

Sch. Are theſe thirteen ſufficient to guide one in making any Sentence? 

619. 4. They are ſufficient, and comprehend all the ways of puttin 
words to words aright in the Latin Tongue. Only obſerve, 

620. N. B. That ſome Verbs Neuter and Paſfrve, and ſome AdjeBives, hav 
after them u Verb Infinite not yet accounted for; as, 
Ego videor videre ſtellam cadentem We ſeem to hear trumpets ſounding 
Tympanum dicitur dare ſonum Drums are ſaid to make a wiſe | 
Quts homo poreſt arcere fulmina e cannot feel ſpirits 
Pueri gaudent rangere” frana Girls yejpice to trim up the 1 
Sencs non putantur apti regi Toung men are apt to be deceived 

But of theſe an cu ſhall be given in the next Book, 


Chap. XVII. Three ſorts of Simple Sentences. 


E 1 ow many of theſe Phraſes go to make one Sentence? | 
621. A. Sometimes one; as, Ego ſto. Tu cubas, Supellex emitii 
2. Sometimes two; as, 0 Thoma, tu garris. Homo portat pondus. 
3. Sometimes three; as, O Jeſu, tu ſerva nos. Magnum epulum ſit nobi 
4. Sometimes four; as, Fœmina bona eſt rara avis. 
5. Sometimes five; as Stultus homo vix implevit yentrem exilem. 
8. Sometimes fix; as, Omnis familia non poteſt dormire in uno lecto. 
7. Sometimes ſeven; 8, Vaſta-poma non vorantur ab hominibus ſanæ ment! 
8. Sometimes eight; as, Eccleſia exercitus Jeſu Chriſti deber pugaa! 
.\conrra hoſtem Diabolum, Cre. | 

Q How many ſorts of Sentences are there ? | 

622. A, A Sentence is either ſingle or compounded, 

Q. What is 4 ſingle or fi mple Sentence 2 © | 
9253. A. That which hath bur one Verb Finite i in it; as; 23 


Verus Deus eſt potens ventorum 
Sævi heriiſunt impotentes iræ 


Tua filia eſt cerra eundi 


End — - 


Man 


hap. 


Man's 4 


4! ras h 
How f 
u {eq1 
bat m 
huis ho 
624. 
ve, 4s 
3 tp 4 
ite, bu 
Q. H 
625. 
entenc 
An 
626. 
duid ef 
daem | 
Duale i 
Q. ik 
627. 
hat-/s 
umus 
Iſtas v 
ulvis 1 
Q. 4 
628, 
hat 70 
a eſto 
os ne 
uer ſe 
629. 
00d; 
620, 
's its 
efore 
631. 
Kc. but 
632, 


1d 40 


( 
V 
ome C 

So tl 
I. Oi 


II. A 
Lil, 


Xun Web. yu. 8 Compound Sefitences. 95 


© an 
ing, þ 


Man's age is Dr l 1 Man's. s age is not ſhort 

rras hominis eſt brevis Atas hominis non eft brevis 

How thou the guide Fillow not thou the guide 

u ſequEre ducem ET, Tu ne ſequere ducem 2 
Pet man condemn's himſelf 2 wil What man condemns not himſe =y 
his homo damnar feipflum? Quis homo non damnar ſeip 

624. N. B. Where you ſee, I. That every fi ngle ſentence is either Afﬀfirma- 
ve, as Age is ſhort; of Nepative, as Age is not ſhort. 

H. That the En glifh put their Negative Particle not, after the Verb Fi- 
mae ite, but the Latins put the irg, non, haud, ne, before it, 

Vm many orts of fi mple Sentences are there? 

925 A. Of ſimple Sentences there be three ſorts: r. An Taterrezative 
entence. 2. An Aſſertive Sentence. 3. An Imperative Sentence. 


har Q. Whit is an Interrog. tive Sentence? 
625. 4. An interrogative Sentence is that by which a Queſt. is asked; as; 
uid eſt lacryma ? What is the name of an horſe 2 
” Dem hominem vocas tu? Which horſe can you manages 
0d uale inſtrumentum eſt fiſtula ? What inſtruments are pipes? 


Q. What is an Aſſertive Sentence ? 
es, by $27. 4. An Afertive Sentence is that wherein it is aſſerted that fome- 

hat -I or is no, doth or doth nit, ſuffers or ſuffers not; as, 
? PFomus non eſt gratus oculis © The eyes cannot bear ſmoak 
uttinfitas venir ante autumnum Autumn will come after Gay 

ulvis non ſeritur pro ſemine Men (ow not jewels for ſeeds 
„ ba Q. What is an Imperative Sentence? 

628, 4. An Imperative Sentence is that wherein it z5 laid upon ſome- 
ng Phat 70 be or not to be; to-oy or not to do, Cc. as, 


a eſto vir ſobrius Be ye ſaber men 
ſos ne eſte barbari Let a woman keep her ſelf chaſte. 
er ſervato fe caſtum Let a ſparrow be roaſted | 


4 529. N. B. I. Interrogative and Aſſertive Sentences are made by the Indic; 
00d; but Imperative Sentences are made by the Imperative. 

630. II. In Interrog. and Imperat. Sentences the Engliſh ſet th? Nome(un- 
ite ſelf be the Interrogative) after the Verb Finize, but the Latins eitber 
efore or after. 

$31. III. Interrogative and Aſſertive Sentences are denied by non, haud, 
Lc. but Imperative by ne. | 

632, IV. Interrogative Sentences have this mark (0 written after them, 
nd Aſſert ive and Imperative this C See all this in the former Exemples. 


emitut 
8. 
"nobi 


Cto, 
nent } 
ugnar 


C HAP. XVIII. of Compoimnded Double Sentences. 


WV. at is a Cmpounded Sentence? 
633. A. When two ſingle Sentences are joined cogerher by 
ome Cople or Tye, they are called a Compound Sentence, * 
So then in che Compound Senrence there 1 is, 5 | 
I. One fingle Sentence; as, Life is ſhirt. © 

II. Another fingle Sentence after it: as, Art is long. ; 
Ul. Between theſe two a Cople is pur co tie them together; as, 


Man 


. 


Compound Sentences. Chap. XVII Cha 


Life is ſhort, and art is long. 
Vita eſt brevis, & ars eſt longa. 


635. A. There are three ſorts of Words which are Coples. 
I. A relative Word, which rehearſeth and fetcheth over a 
ſtantive again; as, Nhe, which, that, Wh quæ, quod. 
II. A comparative Word whereby two t 


art is lo 

Thus 

, Neque, aut 20 aut, quamvis to tamen, 4s you ſpall ſee. 
71 II. The natural place of the Cople is 

copled, and it is ſeldom removed thence; but, 

1. 2uidem is is ſet after the firſt Word of its Sentence. 


* 


Serpants ſew the garments, which garments Kings put on. 
Biblia ſunt liber Dei, pr quo libro cæteri libri debent ſperni. 

The Bible is the word of God, in which word we read our duty. 
Pueri fiunt hebEtes, quibus pueris non licet ludere. 7. Ph. 

The boy becomes dull, to which boy no play is given. 5 
Vir datus eſt Mariz, cujus viri nomen erat Joſephus. 8. Ph. 
A wife was given to Joſeph, which wife's name was Mary. 

Judex non debet plectere homines, antequam peccaverint. 

We cannot hear your words, before that you ſpeak them: 

Hic annus eſt ſecundus, poſtquam nos cœpimus diſcere. 


I. call think my ſelf wretched, after that you ſhall die. 
639. Exemples of a Comparative Cople, 


Tantus Rex eſt Carolus, guantus Rex nemo fuit. 

So big men were the giants, as ſo big no body now is. 
Emi hodie alem equum, gualem equum tu nunquam vendidiſti, 
¶ heard to day ſuch a ſermon, as you never heard in your life. 
Tot erant Apoſtoli, quot erant Tribus Iſraelis. | b 

80 many Miniſters ought to be, as there are Churches, 
Tam dulce eſt Saccharum, uam amarum eſt fel. 


Life is ſbort, but art is long. 
Vita eſt brevis, /ed ars eſt long ff Solo: 
634. N. B. After the firſt Sentence this mark (,) is to be written. 
Q. What Words may be the Coples to join two Sentences together? 


ings are compared together ; 
Tantus, quantus; talis, qualis; tot, quot; tam, quam; ita, ut; Ec. 
III. A Conjunction; as, Et, que, quoque, ſed, vero, &c. 
636. N. B. I. Sometimes there is in the firſt Sentence a Word relating 
the Cople, and putting us in mind to expect it; as, both 4% is ſbort, a 


1g. | | | 

iff relates to qui, tantus to quantus, tam to quam, & fo &, 

between the two Senten: 

2. Quogue, autem, vero, enim, after the firſt Word of the ſecond Senten | 

3. Rue, ne and ce are moreover adjoined to that firſt Word, as you ſhall (: : 
638. I. Exemples wherein the Relative 7s the Cople. 


857 


De 


foregoing $ Viſne 


Siniſt 
O u 
Vita 1 
Porci 
08's : 


becs 
ota 1 
[In vat. 
Quang 


Miſer eſt ille homo, qui homo jacet æger ſub ſepe. 2. Ph. Ithor 
Wretched are the men, which men lie fick under hedges. o 
* . . F 80 tt, 
Felices ſunt mulieres, quas mulieres dolores non premunt. 4. Ph. 
Happy is that woman, which woman grief does not preſs. | 
os ſerimus grana adoris, quæ grana aves vorant. 5. Ph. 


XVI Chap. XVIII. 


ry. [| So pious was Abel, as Cain was impious. 
22a Solomon fuit ſapientior, quam alii reges ſunt. 
The giants were greater than other men now are. 


640. Exemples where Conjunctions are Copleti 
8 S vime tu ſpuere, an non vis ? Vill ye play, or will ye not? | 
Siniſtra manus gerit ſcutum, & dextra manus tenet gladium. 
Old men do die, and young men get their riches. 
Vita noſtra fugit, horæque volant. Time fleeth, and Death cometh: 
Porci gerunt aſperas ſetas, oves guogue habent mollem lanam. 


12 uſe to eat foul meats, dogs allo devour dead fleſh. 
aber aut ſecat lignum, aut parat inftrumenta ſua, 


Either keep thou order in the School, or leave the School. 

Multi guidem ſunt falſi dii, a? eft unus verus Deus? 

any men indeed are taught, but fob men are learned. 

Herus legit, vos vero Juditis, or vos autem luditis. | 

Ego cædo te, guia malus es, We love you, becauſe you are good. 

Non decet me ſequi vos, namęue vos (or vos enim) omnes eſtis cœci. 


Compound Sentetices: : E 


* 


ler; 


Fe. 


ating 
rt, u 


zeque 


ntene 


wy t becomes all you to hear me, tor I have always been wiſe. 
ota ſchola jam 1bit in campos, ui (or nif) Magiſtri vetant. 
In vain men are exereiſed in learning, unleſs (if not) the Rules be true. 


Duanguam {quamvis) tu habes magnas opes, tamen es pauperrimus. 
Although the path of life be narrow, yet the juſt man walks in it. 
go ita feci, ut pater juſſit. Ve have not done ſo, as the thing requires. 


F. II. The Uſe of the Subjundtive Mood. 


Q. was ſaid No. 520. that Verbs of the Sub junct. Mood were to be put 

Ph, er other Verbs in a Compounded Sentence, now ſhew me how they are ſo put. 
641. A. The Subjunctive Mood is to be uſed in Compounded Sentences, 
1. Always after ut or «ti ſignifying that, and ue that not. 


2. Always after ut or «tinam ſignifying O that, and then the SubjunR 
lood is called the Optative or Wiſhing Mood. 


3. Sometimes after i, ni, niſi, cum, quamuis, &c as here you ſee. 
| 642. I. In the firſt Conjugat. Præſ. or Fut. Imperf. 


Ego cenem -—- I ſhould walk 
Tu jentes Thou ſhould'ft how! 
Res po- JAxis erret The matter  JThe ſoldier ſhould fight 
ſcit ut Nos lavemus requires that NWe ſhould cry | 
Vos juretis - | Ve ſhould wail _ 
_ Canes latrent Towers ſpould totter 


943. In the Præter- Imperfect. Subj. 


Ego narem I was breakfaſting 
Tu ululares Thou waſt ſupping ' 
Quis fuit JColumbus volaret ho were yu witneſs was ſwtarirg 
bie cum Nos erraremus here tohen Me were walking 
os ploraretis V were wandring 
Lyræ ſonarent Walow were howling. 
G 644. In 


8 
8 25 75 > a 
2 

- — * 
o 1 


v i \ = 
_ E a — N _ En —_— TAS 
. * 1 p - q l - Is 3 < * þ 4 0 — on” * 
1 _ 1 2 4 — * — 9 „ : 1 3 Nn 8 7 WS nm 
E 2 py = 2 3 — 5 * — Std. 1 - TUE * ' * 
* rr 7 _ Ae - "Sh4av3 — > ar oo wry wy 2 2 $f - , . 9 * or . 9 2 2 
3 — © n 5 3 * 
hu * ” 
. 4 
OPENS SET ones ef eee Oo gr en OE I Geng, 7 Tn © VERITY ns 7 ie 035 — OO” IO I EE OO og 1 iS ces ts er - a N 
— 


vB The Sum of the XII. Phyaſe-Bules. Chap. XIX. 


ha! 


6 — mn 
644. In the Przrerperf. Subj. 
Ego pugnaverim l have reigned 
| Tu naveris 11 Thou haſt plowed 
omnes Iplanca crepaverit * The dragon has flown 
nor: Nos clamaverimus Wat, | 


Te have ſwum 


+ that We have wailed 
runt ut Jvos erraveritis / 


Domus v acaverint The winds have breathed 
645. In the Præterpluperf. Optative. 
o cœnaviſſem 'T had cried out? 
f \\Tu jentaviſſes hn badſt howled ! 
8 ſa ſtetiſſet = JThe Town had wailed ! 
'Z Los erraviſſemus! S Ille had ſwimmed 
© Vos migraviſletis : „Ie had flown! 
[( Roſz ſpitaviſſent! Men had con ſider d 
645. In the Future Perfect Subjunctive. 
Ego cœnavero I 12 „ eee F 
Tu jentaveris | Thou ſhalt have ſuppe 
=o hp Pater ambulaverit | — ! : The Cat ſhall have howled 
nitenus Nos clamaverimus ho Ille ſhall have breakfaſted 
FRO Vos plantaveriris wen /Te ſhall bave cryed out * 
(Jeſtes juraverint | The Citizens ſhall have flitte oe i 
N. B. So the other Conjugations may be gone through. l 38 


CH Ap. XIX. The Summ of all ſaid before about puthzgo a 
ting Words together to make Sentences, ha 


647. NV. B. I. A N Interje&tion moſtly maketh a ſenſe by itſelf, 
| A 648. II. A Conjunction is only uſed to join two Sel 


des 
Quem 
ences together. TE . 

649. III. The other ſix parts of Speech are put into Sentences by XII 38 
Rules. | 


F. III. The Summ of the XIII. Phraſe-Rules. [audio 


650, I. In every ſimple Sentence there is one Verb Finite, and but onfnus 


which agrees with its Nominative Caſe by R. IL, Fra 
651. II. A Noun, Pronoun, or Participle if it be a Subſtantive of num 
1. The Vocative Caſe is only uſed after O, to call by, by R. I. „ 
2. The Nom. Caſe ſ 1. Before a Verb Finite, by R. II. 660 
zs uſed Sd BY Or after Verbs of Being, &c. by R. III. PPuis e 
3. The Accuſative \ 1. Before Verbs Infinite, by No. 542. | 8 | 
Caſe is uſe upon 55 After Verbs Tranſitive, by R. IV. 61 
three accounts / 3. After the firſt 27 Prep. c. by R. VI. No. 5675, (Weeds | 
4. The Ablative only after the 12. Prep. by R. VI. Vo. 568, 569. hen tin 
5. The Dative I. After Verbs put Acquiſitively, by R. VII. and, | 
is uſed either 2. After Adje&:ves, by R. XII. | 
6. The Genitive 1. After another Subſtantive, by R. VIII. ' £62. 
is uſed — . Or after Adzectives of Ability, &c. by R. XIII. Þnly e: 


652. III. A Noun, Pronoun or Participle Adjective eyer agrees wit! 653 
Subſtantive in Caſe, Gender and Number, by X. Tis Cc 


— 


0 Chap. XX. Wozds left out in a Sentence- 


— — | — 
653. IV. Adverbs and Either 1. to Verbs, by R. v. 4 
Prepoſitions are joined Nor 2. to AdjeR. or other words, by R. XI. 
654. N. B. Infinite Verbs and Part. are both Nouns and Verbs, and ſo 
II. Infinite Verbs, Supines and Gerunds being Subſt. are uſed as other Subſt. 
2, Other Participles being Actjectives follow the Rules of AdjeRtives. 
3. All theſe conſidered as Verbs have ſuch Caſes as their Verbs have. 


ed 


21 S there any thing more yet to be known about Sentences ? 

655. A. Two things are yet to be known about Sentences. 

I. That whatever Words may be as well underſtood when left out, as 
they would be, if they were mentioned, may be left our. 

Q. Dpon what accounts may this be done? 

656. A. Words may be leſt out upon four Accounts. 

Q. Firſt, When may words be left out ? 

657. A. I. When a word has been mentioned juſt before, and may be 
od ſuppoſed to be kept in mind, then it is oft left out, as, Ceſar venit, I vi- 
ed dit, & vicit, you need nor ſay, Ceſar venit, oF Ceſar v dit, & Ceſar vicit. 

Nos ſcripſimus, plus quam vos Te have eaten more, than we 

flit Hzc veſtis eſt patris, viz. veſtis This book ts the maſter's, ſc, book 
ujus eſt hic liber? R. meus Whoſe houſe is this? A. ours 

658. Therefore in a Relative Sentence, the Antecedent word is ſeldom 
repeated, but be ſure you fetch it over in your thought; as, 
put Ego amo Chriſtum, qui me emit I bought the books which be there 
u habes uxorem, quam non amas The wine is bad, which yon ſent me 
des templum, quod Rex ſtruxit We teach boys, which learn nathing 
Qem ſermonem audis, non eſt meus What words I ſpate, thoſe Idem 

Q. When, ſecondly, may words be left out ? | 

659. 4. IT. When any word is to be mentioned ſtraight, if it can well 

be underſtood, it may be left our in the former part; as, 

lacent populo, quas facio fahulas Drink ye red, or white wine 
\udio & miror tua verba | J ever did, and ever will love you 


vo Set 


y XII 


| 
of 


bur o nus Fcecidir © puerorum The firſt of the Kings is dead 
Una ex puellarum The ſecond of the Queens is fled 
of Pnum Jnumero templorum The beſt of the Churches is burnt 


Q. When, thirdly, may a word be left out? 
| 660. 4. III. When the thought is expreſſed by ſome other means; as, 
Nuis eft ille ? pointing to a man, you need not ſay, Quis homo eſt ille homo? 
8 When, fourthly, may words be left out? | | | 
51. 4. IV. Thoſe words which upon the mentioning of others, muſt 
675, Peeds be ſuppoſed ro be meant, may be left out; as, When you con e to PauPs 
| hen turn to the left, every body knows you mean Paul's Church and the left 
Jang, therefore thoſe words need not to be expreſſed. 


See Exemples of this in ſeveral Phraſes. 


662. In the 1. Phraſe the interject ion may be leſt out, and the Vocatiye 


XI. dnly expreſſed ; as, Cur tu mentiris, Petre? Parce mihi Domine. 

s with 663. In the 2. Phraſe the Nominative when upon mentioning the Verb, 
Wc 15 certainly known, need not to be expreſied; as, to 

$532Y ; G 2 Amo 


— 


= _— 
f 4 


HAP. XX. What Words may be left out in a Sentence, 


+ 

: 
* 
S 
j 
3 
1 
$ 


E 
1 
7 
* 
7 
1 : 
* N 
1 
„ 
* 
= 
LT 
5 * 
* 1 
1 P 
2 : 
4 } 
8 , 
, ! 
* 
5 | 
= : 
4 * 
N 
« 5 
12 f 
* * 
1 
þ ; 
1 : 
N 
£ 
: | 
7 j 
{ 
| 
9 . 
N 
E ; 
; 
. 
/ 
: ; by 
4 + 
> . 
ä 
. l 
* ' 
5 
. F 
<Y : 
_ : 
1 * 
C * [5 
C ' 
z 
: 
. f 
1 
'T : 
4 - 
_ 
22 9 
1 4 * 
4 | 
„ : 
FT; 7 
* 
7 1 
"4 | 
þ 2 * 
4 * 
. 


109 mods let out in a Sentente. Chap. XX. [Cha 


Amo, amabam, docebo, lego, legam, - 18 E Ego - 1: Eo a 

Amas,amabas,ama,docebis,legis,aud1, 88 * and therefcre <2! 

Amamus,docemus,legebamus,audimus,\ Nos h Vadi 
. : | — they may be 

Amatis, amate, docetote, legetis, aud ite, ( 5 5 vos a ee oat 67 

Aiunt te furere. Dicunt Regem venire z © \ Homines Ne; 

Pluit. grand inat, fulminat 2 5 Nubes Tota 


E f : 
N, B. But you cannot ſay amat, docebat, legunt, audienr, &c. without the caro 
Nom. Caſe, becauſe none can know what it is that loves, teaches, &c. ii nic! 


may be Pater amat, or mater amat, or canis amat, or uxor, Cc. 67 
664. In the VI. Phraſe, 1. Sometimes the Prepoficion is left out Yang | 
2. Sometimes irs Caſe, 3. Sometimes both, Und« 
Pater 


F. 1. The Prepoſition is left out in 12 places. |[Epil 
665. 1. PREG Ih Inflrument hy which Hany thing is done, is uſual] 67 
word that fig- * Cauſe fo; which put in the AblativeCaſe with 8 det 


nifies the Manner after which Your a Prepoſition; as, n 
Findimus radicem quercũs raſtro We dig our Gardens with (pades ind 4 
Pungimus þoves pigros acu A bald crown is veiled with a peruke ¶ jeſt o 
Diſcipuli tacent metu They puniſh a ſlow boy with the rod Quid 
Gaudemus rebus tuis proſper is Rejoice not for the death of another 


Sentio me eſſe laſſum ſcribendo I (ee that you are tired with playing Domi 
Omnes homines ſunt pares natura A ſpeech is made with much care - 3 
666. 2, The word of Price, at which a thing is rated, is put in thc. 15 
Ablative Caſe without the Prepoſition; as, | 2 


ſentabamus hodie tribus aſſibus We dined yeſterday for one as Nives 
Emi duos libros uno ſemiſſe T fold my boot for three half aſſes 
SGemmæ venduntur vil: pretio They ſell jewels at an huge price 8 2 
Except the Genitives, Tanti, quanti, pluris, minoris, c. | 
667. 3. Afcer words ſignifying to be full or empty of any thing, the Al 
lative Caſe is fer down without the Prepoſition; as, = 
Hic ſaccus eſt plenus hamis Theſe ſacks are full of aſhes while 
Tuum cerebrum eſt inane virtute That barrel was empty of ale . 
Mater mea eſt vidua viro ſuo My brother is widowed of his wife 8. 


So egere and carere have an Ablat. without a Prepoficion; as, 
Sum dives quanquam caream nummis you can't read if you want a book the Pi 
Homo pauper eget omnibus rebus Tour pipes need a ſtrong wind N. 
668, 4. Fungor, fruor, utor, potior; dignus, ind ignus, have an Ab! Cum! 
Caſe witbout a Prep. as, i Dum 


Juſtus vir fungicur officio ſuo Unjuſt men diſcharge not their duties Cum u 
Acer miles fruitur eriumpho Smart ſoldiers enjoy triumphs N. 
Anus macra utitur baculo ſuo Fat old men uſe their ſtaff's , 01 
Manus larga eſt digna laude Bad works are unworthy of fame oſtqu 
669. 5. Ad is let our before u and domus, and Proper Names I Cum ® 
Towns; as, | Cum c 
Hod ie iturus ſum Londinum Many men are going to Rome 
ubeo, mi fili, ut eas domum Go and carry this burthen home 
Jam ibimus rus, ibique venabimur O child, flee thou into the country [While 


970, II. After Verbs of motion the firſt Supine is put, and ad left out; A7 the 


X. | Chap. xX. woꝛds left out in a Sentente. er 


Eo amatum Came ge hither to ſieeßꝰ?ꝰꝛ 
fcre Veni viſum te | We go to hear ſermons = 
be {| Yadimus venatum J am going to accuſe the (cholar 


671. 6. Before the meaſure of time or ſpace, ad or per is oft lefe out in 
Latin, and throngb or for in Engliſh; as, 287 7 


Totam hyemem dormis Bees gather honey all the ſummer 
ut the Carolus regnavir triginta annos I have been here a whole hour 
c. 1'YHic liber eſt craſſus tres digitos That river is ten foot broad 


672. 7. A, ab, or ex ſignifying from a place, coming before ru, domus, 
out Fand the Proper Names of Towns is left out; as, 


Unde venis? Venio rure | The goats are come out of the Country 
Pater dudum exivit domo When came your ſon from home 
Epiſcopus olim migravit Roma The Queen hath remov'd from London 
ſuallſl 573. 8. In before rus, and Proper Names of Towns is leſt out; as, 
wich IProceres ſolent venari rure Hares uſe to lurk in the Country 
Omnes artes valebant arhenis Scipio beat Hannibal at Carthage 


674. But if the Name of the Town be of the firſt or ſecond Declenſion, 


and of the Singular Number, it muſt be put in the Genitive, and in urbe 
left out; as, | 


od Quid faciam Roma, for in urbe Romæ What wil ye do at London? 


ber N. B. So humi, domi, militiz, belli, are uſed in the Genitive; as, 

1 Domi bellique ſimul viximus 1 tarry at home, thu at war 

1 675. 9. In before words of time, is oft leſt out; as, 

in eng Stellæ lucent nocte, non die We ſtudy a-days, not a- nights 
Nives non cadunt menſe Julio Hail hath often fallen in Auguſt 


A 6 . 2. Howto turn a Compounded Sentence into a Simple 
| one by the Ablative Caſe Abſolute. 


676. 10, When we are to expreſs that a thing is, does, or fuffers, when, 
while, or after that any thing is, does, or ſuffers, we may 
1. Caſt away the Coples, when, while, after. 
ife 2, Then turn the Nominative after them into the Ablative Caſe. 
3. Turn the Verb into a Participle Adj. to agree with ir, leaving out 
11 the Pre poſition, and this is called the Ablative Caſe abſolute. 
N. B. If the Verb be put Imperfettly turn it into ans, ens, or iens; af, 
7 Cum Rex veniret, hoſtes fugerunt Rege veniente, hoſtes fugerunt 
Dum Magiſter decet, pueri ludunt Magiſtro docente, pueri ludunt 
Cum nos cœnabimus, tibiæ ſonabunt Nobis cœnantibus, tibiæ ſonabunt 


ane N. B. But if it ſignify Perſectly, change it into the Participle in tus, ſus, 
or Kus; , | . Hs | 
ne oſtquam fol eſſet ortus, ivi venatum Sole orto, ivi venatum 


Cum ædes fuifſent purgatæ ancilla dormivit Adibus purgatis, anc. &c. 


— Cum cauſa eſt jud icata, latro ſuſpenditur Torre accenſo, quærimus libros 


1 Imitations. 
ntry I hile the Maſter ex bort s the men, dig The Maſter exhor ting, the men dig 


out; YA the barber clips, the hairs fal When a gale blows, the boughs _ 


8 
(| 

$ 

? 

= 

/ 

9 
1 
1 


— ern. . — a" 9 


—_— —— — . © 
n ** ©. 
* S * 


10 Mozvs left out in a Sentence. Chap. xx, © 


— —  —  — —— — 
The fiſb being caught, the net is taken up The Maſter raging, the boys tremble I 


After the doors are ſhut, ye can't enter The wife ſeen, the husband fled Hi 


"677.44, Words of the Comparative Degree ſignifying more ſo than ano- 


ther thing, may have after them the Name of that thing in the Ablative C] 


without the Prep. as, 
Hic vir eſt mollior muliere, i. e. prz That woman is ſtouter than a man | 
Pater meus eſt hilarior matre My ſiſter is ſadder than my brother fre 
Tu videris ſurdior omnibus ſaxis I ſeem brisker than a live flame Lu 
678. 12. After Verbs of Warning, Accuſing, Condemning and Acquitting, Me 
the Prepoſition de is oft left out; as, On 
Ego condemnabo te eodem crimine Tou are accuſed of many Crimes Re 
679. S. II. Sometimes the Caſe is left out; as, BPH 
Pater jam exivit, viz. domo Drive you out the dog, viz. out of doors Pu 
I prz, ſequar, vix. prez me I will go before, viz. you { 

Pone venir conjux, viz. me Come you behind, viz. me. 

680. S. III. Sometimes both the Prep. and irs Caſe are left out, ( 
So I. After Verbs of warning, accuſing, condemning and acquiting, De cri- 6 
mine may be left out, becauſe none are accuſed but of 4 Crime; as, 1. 
Accuſo re furti, i. e. de crimine furti Jon are accuſed of adultery "I 
Condemnamus vos doh mali Ton condemn us of evil frauds 3. 
68 1. So II. All words put Parti ively, i. e. denoting part out of mam), p 
Have a Genir. after them, ex numero being underſtood ! as, inſtead of Tu es 1j,; 
unus ex numero Diſcipulorum, Tu es unus Diſcipulorum. 6 
Magiſter cecĩd it ſeptem puerorum 7 ſaw three of the Magiſtrates ['ve 
David Rex fuit primus poetarum Wone of the girls can read Ro 
Pauci virorum ſunt boni Ten of the Apaſtles were flain ; 


Alter fratrum cecidit in bello The other of the ſiſters is faireſt Fas 
682, In the VII. Phr, the Dative when known may be left out; as, 


bg Fora alt ; Scri 
Da panem, viz, mihi Reach the cup, i, e. to me | 
683. In the VIII. Phr. the firſt Subſtantive may be left our, viz. when 
upon hearing the ſecond, ir is well enough underſtood ; as, 6 


Venimus ad Pauli, viz. remplum When you come to St, Peters's, flop 1 de / 
684. In the IX. One of the Subſtantives is left out, viz. when, Cc. a5Þj th; 
Nunquam vidi Regem, viz, Carolum My father is come to town, i. e. Lond yy, | 
685, In the X. The Adjective omitted when eaſily underſtood; as, 22 , 
Monftra te virum, viz. fortem She ſhews her ſelf a woman, i. e. weal 
Eſpecially the Poſſeſſives meus, tuus, ſuus, noſter, veſter, are ſo left out; a f 


Vid iſtine Patrem hod ie? vix. tuum Where & your ſiſter ? This 
Tu ira re geris erga matrem? How carry ye your ſelves ill to your Mr *Þ Give 
686. The Subſtantive is moſt frequently omitted. | Is t. 
1. Homo is left ont; as, 3 w 
Quis me vocat? Whom do ye cal? þ 
Javenis fiet ſenex | The young deſire to be old CH 
- Amicus juvabit amicum The friendly love the friendly Q. 
Pauperes cupiunt videri divites The rich deſpiſe the poor | 
Dominus novit viam piorum To day I heard one preaching tenct 


Rex & Reginæ ſunt beati, vix.hominesThe man and his wife are righteous uch 
887. 2, Menſis is left out in twelve names of Months; as, ther; 


$94" 


* — ; 
1 


XX. | Chap. XXI. moꝛds tratiſplaced in a Sentence. 


| 2 ” — 
ble I Rex mortuus eſt ſexto die Februarii We began the fifth of Offober _ _ + 
Hie eſt primus dies Januarii And ended the eighth of December 
688, 3. Manis is oft underſtood as Hand in Engliſh; as, 


ative | Chriſtus ſeder ad dextram Patris Turn you fo the right : 

Cur prehendis me finiftra I will go to the left | h 
689. 4. Negotium and Officium in Latin, and Thing or Ad in Engliſh art 
5 frequently left out when they may be underſtood; as, . 
| Lupus eſt triſte ſtabulis To write a ſhort letter is eaſy 
-+tins 4 Mentiri non eſt meum To number the ſend of the Sea is hard 

omnia ſunt miſera in bello It's rare to ſee a wiſe woman 
Recte agere intereſt veſtra It concerns you d be good 
i. e. eſt inter veſtra negot ia i. e. It is among your concerns 

Puerorum eſt (officium) parẽre Ma- It's your duty to obey Kings 

Foe giſtris. 


FC. 3. Words left out in a Compound Sentence. 
, | Q. What Words may be left out in the COompounded Sentence? 
De cri} sg. 4. In a Compounded Sentence, 
t. Sometimes the firſt Sentence is left our, that is when they 
2. Sometimes the Cople is left out, are as well un- 
3. Sometimes both the firſt Sentence and the Cople; & derſtood. 
691. Sometimes the firſt Sentence is omitted; as, 
Tu Sf vtinam cecid iſſes in bello: ſupply O. Ur vales ? i. e. quæro or rogo. 
692. Sometimes the Cople is omitted; as, 
Velim, cures ſalutem tuam, i. e. velim ut, &c, 
Rogo, ſeribas ad me de iſta re, for ut ſcribas. 


693. 3. Sometimes both the firſt Sent. and the Cople ate leſt out; 28. 
ſt Eas per me in malam crucem, i. e. licet ut eas, Cc. | | 
-3 45, PScribas ad me de rebus omnibus, i. e. fac ut ſcribas, (gc. 
F. wher The Cople That left t out in Engliſh. 


694. N. B. The Cople that is oft left out in Engliſh, but not in Latin; as, 
flop }1defire (that) you would ſup with me Rogo ut cœnes mecum 
Oc s think I ſaw him, i. e. that I, &c. Puto me vid iſſe illum 4 
We came after the rain was over, i. e. after that, not poſt but poſtquam 
Te were here before we came, i. e. before that, not ante but antequam 


e. weak 695. Eſpecially when it is Relative that, which, who, whom, may be 


t out; 45 in Engliſh omitted, but not in Latin; as, 
: This is the borſe I ſold to you Hic eſt equus quem tibi vendidi 
our Mr *Þ Give me the book you bought Da mihi librum quem emiſti 


Is this the reward ye ſpike of, i. e. of Hoccine eſt premium de quo locuti 
which 2. eiiie f 


CHAP. XXI. The Words in a Sentence may be tranſplaced. 


W Hich i the ſecond thing to be ebſerved about Sentences ? 
| 696. A. II. The Latins uſe not to place the words of a Sen- 


Ieence always in their natural order as they lie in ſenſe, but put them into 
ghteous uch order as will ſound ſweeteſt to the ear, bur fo that the ſenſe be not 
B 

Nef ö Q How, 


— — — 


> PO 


q 


2 _ ” — — - 
I 8—9ẽ% —L———— — 0x; ðͥV “ 


104 Woꝛds tran p'ated in a Sentente. Chap. XXI. 


may begin ſix times with vive. 


It ic the ruſtom of boy to ſlight their Maſters; Pucrorum mos eſt ſpernere, G1 


Ee ha. 
* 


Q. How may the words of a Sentence be thus tranſpoſed? 
697. 4. I. A Sentence of two words may be put two ways; as, 
Ego vivo or vivo ego, Dominus dicit or dicit Dominus. a 
698. II. If there be three words in a Sent. it may be put fix ways; as, 
Vivimus vitam brevem Vitam vivimus brevem Brevem vitam vivimus 


'Vivimus brevem vitam Vitam brevem vivimus Brevem vivimus vitam 


So turn ars eſt longa Vita eſt brevis Mceſta mors venir, Cc. 
699. III. A Sentence of four words may be put 24 ways, as in this, you 
And fix times with memor. 

Memor vive mortis venientis 
Memor vive venientis mortis 
Memor mortis venientis vive 

_ Memor mortis vive venientis 
Memor venientis mortis vive 


Vive memor mortis venientis 
Vive memor venientis mortis 
Vive mortis memor venientis 
Vive mortis venientis memor 
Vive venientis mortis memor 
Vive venientis memor morcis Memor venientis vive mortis 
And fix times with mortis And fix times with venientis, 
So turn animalia viva debent mori, and ſomnus premit vigiles oculos, Cc. 
700. IV. A Sent. of five words may be put 120 ways; as in this you 
may begin 24 times with Chriſtus, and 24 times with every other word, 
Chriſtus emir homines ſaaguine ſuo Chriſtus emit ſanguine homines ſuo 
Chriſtus emjr homines ſuo ſanguine Chriſtus emit ſanguine ſuo homines, c. 
So turn Cives cinxerunt murum gemino vallo -. 
701. V. A Sentence of fix words may be changed 720 ways, beginning 
x20 times with each of theſe fix words; as, | 
Pueri ſolent urgere parentes frequenrtibus epiſtolis, c. 
Q. May we then miſplace all words in every Sentence as we pleaſe ? 
- © 702. A. No, not always, but you muſt in this as in all other thing) 
follow the uſe of the beſt Speakers, of which you ſhall have Direction 
in the next Book. | 5 
N. B. Some words in Engliſh are tranſplaced which you muſt ſet right. 
703. A. The Prepoſition is ſometimes ler the laſt word in the Sentence; as, 
My loſs of time I blame you f? i. e. blame you for the los of my time. 
Eſpecially in Interrogative and Relative Sentences; as, 
hat ſpeak you that for * i. e. For what ſpake you that? 
Whom do you ſpeak againſt ? What place came you from? 
This is the man that I ſpoke 0 you of, i. e. of whom I ſpoke ? 
Jog. Oſt we put the Nominar. after the Verb, and before it ſet Ther: 
For which rhere js no Latin word; as, 
There was & man, i. e. A man was, Fuit homo. 
There eame a boy to me; Venit ad me puer quidam- 
208, If the Nominative Caſe to the Verb be a Verb Infinite, or a Ser 
tence, we uſually ſer it after the Verb Finite, and put it before ir; a 
It is an evil thing to lye, i. e. to lye is an evil thing; malum eſt mentiri. 


Satis eft ft non nimis. 


r 


S. 


lis you 
word. 
es ſuo 


es, Oc. 


inning 


thing! 
ect ion 


| 
ice; 45, 
fo 


